sparserevlog: document the config option

This was overlooked when this graduated from experimental.

mercurial/help/config.txt

@@ -1,2766 +1,2776 b''
 The Mercurial system uses a set of configuration files to control
 aspects of its behavior.
 
 Troubleshooting
 ===============
 
 If you're having problems with your configuration,
 :hg:`config --debug` can help you understand what is introducing
 a setting into your environment.
 
 See :hg:`help config.syntax` and :hg:`help config.files`
 for information about how and where to override things.
 
 Structure
 =========
 
 The configuration files use a simple ini-file format. A configuration
 file consists of sections, led by a ``[section]`` header and followed
 by ``name = value`` entries::
 
   [ui]
   username = Firstname Lastname <[e-mail]>
   verbose = True
 
 The above entries will be referred to as ``ui.username`` and
 ``ui.verbose``, respectively. See :hg:`help config.syntax`.
 
 Files
 =====
 
 Mercurial reads configuration data from several files, if they exist.
 These files do not exist by default and you will have to create the
 appropriate configuration files yourself:
 
 Local configuration is put into the per-repository ``<repo>/.hg/hgrc`` file.
 
 Global configuration like the username setting is typically put into:
 
 .. container:: windows
 
   - ``%USERPROFILE%\mercurial.ini`` (on Windows)
 
 .. container:: unix.plan9
 
   - ``$HOME/.hgrc`` (on Unix, Plan9)
 
 The names of these files depend on the system on which Mercurial is
 installed. ``*.rc`` files from a single directory are read in
 alphabetical order, later ones overriding earlier ones. Where multiple
 paths are given below, settings from earlier paths override later
 ones.
 
 .. container:: verbose.unix
 
   On Unix, the following files are consulted:
 
   - ``<repo>/.hg/hgrc`` (per-repository)
   - ``$HOME/.hgrc`` (per-user)
   - ``${XDG_CONFIG_HOME:-$HOME/.config}/hg/hgrc`` (per-user)
   - ``<install-root>/etc/mercurial/hgrc`` (per-installation)
   - ``<install-root>/etc/mercurial/hgrc.d/*.rc`` (per-installation)
   - ``/etc/mercurial/hgrc`` (per-system)
   - ``/etc/mercurial/hgrc.d/*.rc`` (per-system)
   - ``<internal>/default.d/*.rc`` (defaults)
 
 .. container:: verbose.windows
 
   On Windows, the following files are consulted:
 
   - ``<repo>/.hg/hgrc`` (per-repository)
   - ``%USERPROFILE%\.hgrc`` (per-user)
   - ``%USERPROFILE%\Mercurial.ini`` (per-user)
   - ``%HOME%\.hgrc`` (per-user)
   - ``%HOME%\Mercurial.ini`` (per-user)
   - ``HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Mercurial`` (per-installation)
   - ``<install-dir>\hgrc.d\*.rc`` (per-installation)
   - ``<install-dir>\Mercurial.ini`` (per-installation)
   - ``<internal>/default.d/*.rc`` (defaults)
 
   .. note::
 
    The registry key ``HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Mercurial``
    is used when running 32-bit Python on 64-bit Windows.
 
 .. container:: windows
 
   On Windows 9x, ``%HOME%`` is replaced by ``%APPDATA%``.
 
 .. container:: verbose.plan9
 
   On Plan9, the following files are consulted:
 
   - ``<repo>/.hg/hgrc`` (per-repository)
   - ``$home/lib/hgrc`` (per-user)
   - ``<install-root>/lib/mercurial/hgrc`` (per-installation)
   - ``<install-root>/lib/mercurial/hgrc.d/*.rc`` (per-installation)
   - ``/lib/mercurial/hgrc`` (per-system)
   - ``/lib/mercurial/hgrc.d/*.rc`` (per-system)
   - ``<internal>/default.d/*.rc`` (defaults)
 
 Per-repository configuration options only apply in a
 particular repository. This file is not version-controlled, and
 will not get transferred during a "clone" operation. Options in
 this file override options in all other configuration files.
 
 .. container:: unix.plan9
 
   On Plan 9 and Unix, most of this file will be ignored if it doesn't
   belong to a trusted user or to a trusted group. See
   :hg:`help config.trusted` for more details.
 
 Per-user configuration file(s) are for the user running Mercurial.  Options
 in these files apply to all Mercurial commands executed by this user in any
 directory. Options in these files override per-system and per-installation
 options.
 
 Per-installation configuration files are searched for in the
 directory where Mercurial is installed. ``<install-root>`` is the
 parent directory of the **hg** executable (or symlink) being run.
 
 .. container:: unix.plan9
 
   For example, if installed in ``/shared/tools/bin/hg``, Mercurial
   will look in ``/shared/tools/etc/mercurial/hgrc``. Options in these
   files apply to all Mercurial commands executed by any user in any
   directory.
 
 Per-installation configuration files are for the system on
 which Mercurial is running. Options in these files apply to all
 Mercurial commands executed by any user in any directory. Registry
 keys contain PATH-like strings, every part of which must reference
 a ``Mercurial.ini`` file or be a directory where ``*.rc`` files will
 be read.  Mercurial checks each of these locations in the specified
 order until one or more configuration files are detected.
 
 Per-system configuration files are for the system on which Mercurial
 is running. Options in these files apply to all Mercurial commands
 executed by any user in any directory. Options in these files
 override per-installation options.
 
 Mercurial comes with some default configuration. The default configuration
 files are installed with Mercurial and will be overwritten on upgrades. Default
 configuration files should never be edited by users or administrators but can
 be overridden in other configuration files. So far the directory only contains
 merge tool configuration but packagers can also put other default configuration
 there.
 
 Syntax
 ======
 
 A configuration file consists of sections, led by a ``[section]`` header
 and followed by ``name = value`` entries (sometimes called
 ``configuration keys``)::
 
     [spam]
     eggs=ham
     green=
        eggs
 
 Each line contains one entry. If the lines that follow are indented,
 they are treated as continuations of that entry. Leading whitespace is
 removed from values. Empty lines are skipped. Lines beginning with
 ``#`` or ``;`` are ignored and may be used to provide comments.
 
 Configuration keys can be set multiple times, in which case Mercurial
 will use the value that was configured last. As an example::
 
     [spam]
     eggs=large
     ham=serrano
     eggs=small
 
 This would set the configuration key named ``eggs`` to ``small``.
 
 It is also possible to define a section multiple times. A section can
 be redefined on the same and/or on different configuration files. For
 example::
 
     [foo]
     eggs=large
     ham=serrano
     eggs=small
 
     [bar]
     eggs=ham
     green=
        eggs
 
     [foo]
     ham=prosciutto
     eggs=medium
     bread=toasted
 
 This would set the ``eggs``, ``ham``, and ``bread`` configuration keys
 of the ``foo`` section to ``medium``, ``prosciutto``, and ``toasted``,
 respectively. As you can see there only thing that matters is the last
 value that was set for each of the configuration keys.
 
 If a configuration key is set multiple times in different
 configuration files the final value will depend on the order in which
 the different configuration files are read, with settings from earlier
 paths overriding later ones as described on the ``Files`` section
 above.
 
 A line of the form ``%include file`` will include ``file`` into the
 current configuration file. The inclusion is recursive, which means
 that included files can include other files. Filenames are relative to
 the configuration file in which the ``%include`` directive is found.
 Environment variables and ``~user`` constructs are expanded in
 ``file``. This lets you do something like::
 
   %include ~/.hgrc.d/$HOST.rc
 
 to include a different configuration file on each computer you use.
 
 A line with ``%unset name`` will remove ``name`` from the current
 section, if it has been set previously.
 
 The values are either free-form text strings, lists of text strings,
 or Boolean values. Boolean values can be set to true using any of "1",
 "yes", "true", or "on" and to false using "0", "no", "false", or "off"
 (all case insensitive).
 
 List values are separated by whitespace or comma, except when values are
 placed in double quotation marks::
 
   allow_read = "John Doe, PhD", brian, betty
 
 Quotation marks can be escaped by prefixing them with a backslash. Only
 quotation marks at the beginning of a word is counted as a quotation
 (e.g., ``foo"bar baz`` is the list of ``foo"bar`` and ``baz``).
 
 Sections
 ========
 
 This section describes the different sections that may appear in a
 Mercurial configuration file, the purpose of each section, its possible
 keys, and their possible values.
 
 ``alias``
 ---------
 
 Defines command aliases.
 
 Aliases allow you to define your own commands in terms of other
 commands (or aliases), optionally including arguments. Positional
 arguments in the form of ``$1``, ``$2``, etc. in the alias definition
 are expanded by Mercurial before execution. Positional arguments not
 already used by ``$N`` in the definition are put at the end of the
 command to be executed.
 
 Alias definitions consist of lines of the form::
 
     <alias> = <command> [<argument>]...
 
 For example, this definition::
 
     latest = log --limit 5
 
 creates a new command ``latest`` that shows only the five most recent
 changesets. You can define subsequent aliases using earlier ones::
 
     stable5 = latest -b stable
 
 .. note::
 
    It is possible to create aliases with the same names as
    existing commands, which will then override the original
    definitions. This is almost always a bad idea!
 
 An alias can start with an exclamation point (``!``) to make it a
 shell alias. A shell alias is executed with the shell and will let you
 run arbitrary commands. As an example, ::
 
    echo = !echo $@
 
 will let you do ``hg echo foo`` to have ``foo`` printed in your
 terminal. A better example might be::
 
    purge = !$HG status --no-status --unknown -0 re: | xargs -0 rm -f
 
 which will make ``hg purge`` delete all unknown files in the
 repository in the same manner as the purge extension.
 
 Positional arguments like ``$1``, ``$2``, etc. in the alias definition
 expand to the command arguments. Unmatched arguments are
 removed. ``$0`` expands to the alias name and ``$@`` expands to all
 arguments separated by a space. ``"$@"`` (with quotes) expands to all
 arguments quoted individually and separated by a space. These expansions
 happen before the command is passed to the shell.
 
 Shell aliases are executed in an environment where ``$HG`` expands to
 the path of the Mercurial that was used to execute the alias. This is
 useful when you want to call further Mercurial commands in a shell
 alias, as was done above for the purge alias. In addition,
 ``$HG_ARGS`` expands to the arguments given to Mercurial. In the ``hg
 echo foo`` call above, ``$HG_ARGS`` would expand to ``echo foo``.
 
 .. note::
 
    Some global configuration options such as ``-R`` are
    processed before shell aliases and will thus not be passed to
    aliases.
 
 
 ``annotate``
 ------------
 
 Settings used when displaying file annotations. All values are
 Booleans and default to False. See :hg:`help config.diff` for
 related options for the diff command.
 
 ``ignorews``
     Ignore white space when comparing lines.
 
 ``ignorewseol``
     Ignore white space at the end of a line when comparing lines.
 
 ``ignorewsamount``
     Ignore changes in the amount of white space.
 
 ``ignoreblanklines``
     Ignore changes whose lines are all blank.
 
 
 ``auth``
 --------
 
 Authentication credentials and other authentication-like configuration
 for HTTP connections. This section allows you to store usernames and
 passwords for use when logging *into* HTTP servers. See
 :hg:`help config.web` if you want to configure *who* can login to
 your HTTP server.
 
 The following options apply to all hosts.
 
 ``cookiefile``
     Path to a file containing HTTP cookie lines. Cookies matching a
     host will be sent automatically.
 
     The file format uses the Mozilla cookies.txt format, which defines cookies
     on their own lines. Each line contains 7 fields delimited by the tab
     character (domain, is_domain_cookie, path, is_secure, expires, name,
     value). For more info, do an Internet search for "Netscape cookies.txt
     format."
 
     Note: the cookies parser does not handle port numbers on domains. You
     will need to remove ports from the domain for the cookie to be recognized.
     This could result in a cookie being disclosed to an unwanted server.
 
     The cookies file is read-only.
 
 Other options in this section are grouped by name and have the following
 format::
 
     <name>.<argument> = <value>
 
 where ``<name>`` is used to group arguments into authentication
 entries. Example::
 
     foo.prefix = hg.intevation.de/mercurial
     foo.username = foo
     foo.password = bar
     foo.schemes = http https
 
     bar.prefix = secure.example.org
     bar.key = path/to/file.key
     bar.cert = path/to/file.cert
     bar.schemes = https
 
 Supported arguments:
 
 ``prefix``
     Either ``*`` or a URI prefix with or without the scheme part.
     The authentication entry with the longest matching prefix is used
     (where ``*`` matches everything and counts as a match of length
     1). If the prefix doesn't include a scheme, the match is performed
     against the URI with its scheme stripped as well, and the schemes
     argument, q.v., is then subsequently consulted.
 
 ``username``
     Optional. Username to authenticate with. If not given, and the
     remote site requires basic or digest authentication, the user will
     be prompted for it. Environment variables are expanded in the
     username letting you do ``foo.username = $USER``. If the URI
     includes a username, only ``[auth]`` entries with a matching
     username or without a username will be considered.
 
 ``password``
     Optional. Password to authenticate with. If not given, and the
     remote site requires basic or digest authentication, the user
     will be prompted for it.
 
 ``key``
     Optional. PEM encoded client certificate key file. Environment
     variables are expanded in the filename.
 
 ``cert``
     Optional. PEM encoded client certificate chain file. Environment
     variables are expanded in the filename.
 
 ``schemes``
     Optional. Space separated list of URI schemes to use this
     authentication entry with. Only used if the prefix doesn't include
     a scheme. Supported schemes are http and https. They will match
     static-http and static-https respectively, as well.
     (default: https)
 
 If no suitable authentication entry is found, the user is prompted
 for credentials as usual if required by the remote.
 
 ``color``
 ---------
 
 Configure the Mercurial color mode. For details about how to define your custom
 effect and style see :hg:`help color`.
 
 ``mode``
     String: control the method used to output color. One of ``auto``, ``ansi``,
     ``win32``, ``terminfo`` or ``debug``. In auto mode, Mercurial will
     use ANSI mode by default (or win32 mode prior to Windows 10) if it detects a
     terminal. Any invalid value will disable color.
 
 ``pagermode``
     String: optional override of ``color.mode`` used with pager.
 
     On some systems, terminfo mode may cause problems when using
     color with ``less -R`` as a pager program. less with the -R option
     will only display ECMA-48 color codes, and terminfo mode may sometimes
     emit codes that less doesn't understand. You can work around this by
     either using ansi mode (or auto mode), or by using less -r (which will
     pass through all terminal control codes, not just color control
     codes).
 
     On some systems (such as MSYS in Windows), the terminal may support
     a different color mode than the pager program.
 
 ``commands``
 ------------
 
 ``resolve.confirm``
     Confirm before performing action if no filename is passed.
     (default: False)
 
 ``resolve.explicit-re-merge``
     Require uses of ``hg resolve`` to specify which action it should perform,
     instead of re-merging files by default.
     (default: False)
 
 ``resolve.mark-check``
     Determines what level of checking :hg:`resolve --mark` will perform before
     marking files as resolved. Valid values are ``none`, ``warn``, and
     ``abort``. ``warn`` will output a warning listing the file(s) that still
     have conflict markers in them, but will still mark everything resolved.
     ``abort`` will output the same warning but will not mark things as resolved.
     If --all is passed and this is set to ``abort``, only a warning will be
     shown (an error will not be raised).
     (default: ``none``)
 
 ``status.relative``
     Make paths in :hg:`status` output relative to the current directory.
     (default: False)
 
 ``status.terse``
     Default value for the --terse flag, which condenses status output.
     (default: empty)
 
 ``update.check``
     Determines what level of checking :hg:`update` will perform before moving
     to a destination revision. Valid values are ``abort``, ``none``,
     ``linear``, and ``noconflict``. ``abort`` always fails if the working
     directory has uncommitted changes. ``none`` performs no checking, and may
     result in a merge with uncommitted changes. ``linear`` allows any update
     as long as it follows a straight line in the revision history, and may
     trigger a merge with uncommitted changes. ``noconflict`` will allow any
     update which would not trigger a merge with uncommitted changes, if any
     are present.
     (default: ``linear``)
 
 ``update.requiredest``
     Require that the user pass a destination when running :hg:`update`.
     For example, :hg:`update .::` will be allowed, but a plain :hg:`update`
     will be disallowed.
     (default: False)
 
 ``committemplate``
 ------------------
 
 ``changeset``
     String: configuration in this section is used as the template to
     customize the text shown in the editor when committing.
 
 In addition to pre-defined template keywords, commit log specific one
 below can be used for customization:
 
 ``extramsg``
     String: Extra message (typically 'Leave message empty to abort
     commit.'). This may be changed by some commands or extensions.
 
 For example, the template configuration below shows as same text as
 one shown by default::
 
     [committemplate]
     changeset = {desc}\n\n
         HG: Enter commit message.  Lines beginning with 'HG:' are removed.
         HG: {extramsg}
         HG: --
         HG: user: {author}\n{ifeq(p2rev, "-1", "",
        "HG: branch merge\n")
        }HG: branch '{branch}'\n{if(activebookmark,
        "HG: bookmark '{activebookmark}'\n")   }{subrepos %
        "HG: subrepo {subrepo}\n"              }{file_adds %
        "HG: added {file}\n"                   }{file_mods %
        "HG: changed {file}\n"                 }{file_dels %
        "HG: removed {file}\n"                 }{if(files, "",
        "HG: no files changed\n")}
 
 ``diff()``
     String: show the diff (see :hg:`help templates` for detail)
 
 Sometimes it is helpful to show the diff of the changeset in the editor without
 having to prefix 'HG: ' to each line so that highlighting works correctly. For
 this, Mercurial provides a special string which will ignore everything below
 it::
 
      HG: ------------------------ >8 ------------------------
 
 For example, the template configuration below will show the diff below the
 extra message::
 
     [committemplate]
     changeset = {desc}\n\n
         HG: Enter commit message.  Lines beginning with 'HG:' are removed.
         HG: {extramsg}
         HG: ------------------------ >8 ------------------------
         HG: Do not touch the line above.
         HG: Everything below will be removed.
         {diff()}
 
 .. note::
 
    For some problematic encodings (see :hg:`help win32mbcs` for
    detail), this customization should be configured carefully, to
    avoid showing broken characters.
 
    For example, if a multibyte character ending with backslash (0x5c) is
    followed by the ASCII character 'n' in the customized template,
    the sequence of backslash and 'n' is treated as line-feed unexpectedly
    (and the multibyte character is broken, too).
 
 Customized template is used for commands below (``--edit`` may be
 required):
 
 - :hg:`backout`
 - :hg:`commit`
 - :hg:`fetch` (for merge commit only)
 - :hg:`graft`
 - :hg:`histedit`
 - :hg:`import`
 - :hg:`qfold`, :hg:`qnew` and :hg:`qrefresh`
 - :hg:`rebase`
 - :hg:`shelve`
 - :hg:`sign`
 - :hg:`tag`
 - :hg:`transplant`
 
 Configuring items below instead of ``changeset`` allows showing
 customized message only for specific actions, or showing different
 messages for each action.
 
 - ``changeset.backout`` for :hg:`backout`
 - ``changeset.commit.amend.merge`` for :hg:`commit --amend` on merges
 - ``changeset.commit.amend.normal`` for :hg:`commit --amend` on other
 - ``changeset.commit.normal.merge`` for :hg:`commit` on merges
 - ``changeset.commit.normal.normal`` for :hg:`commit` on other
 - ``changeset.fetch`` for :hg:`fetch` (impling merge commit)
 - ``changeset.gpg.sign`` for :hg:`sign`
 - ``changeset.graft`` for :hg:`graft`
 - ``changeset.histedit.edit`` for ``edit`` of :hg:`histedit`
 - ``changeset.histedit.fold`` for ``fold`` of :hg:`histedit`
 - ``changeset.histedit.mess`` for ``mess`` of :hg:`histedit`
 - ``changeset.histedit.pick`` for ``pick`` of :hg:`histedit`
 - ``changeset.import.bypass`` for :hg:`import --bypass`
 - ``changeset.import.normal.merge`` for :hg:`import` on merges
 - ``changeset.import.normal.normal`` for :hg:`import` on other
 - ``changeset.mq.qnew`` for :hg:`qnew`
 - ``changeset.mq.qfold`` for :hg:`qfold`
 - ``changeset.mq.qrefresh`` for :hg:`qrefresh`
 - ``changeset.rebase.collapse`` for :hg:`rebase --collapse`
 - ``changeset.rebase.merge`` for :hg:`rebase` on merges
 - ``changeset.rebase.normal`` for :hg:`rebase` on other
 - ``changeset.shelve.shelve`` for :hg:`shelve`
 - ``changeset.tag.add`` for :hg:`tag` without ``--remove``
 - ``changeset.tag.remove`` for :hg:`tag --remove`
 - ``changeset.transplant.merge`` for :hg:`transplant` on merges
 - ``changeset.transplant.normal`` for :hg:`transplant` on other
 
 These dot-separated lists of names are treated as hierarchical ones.
 For example, ``changeset.tag.remove`` customizes the commit message
 only for :hg:`tag --remove`, but ``changeset.tag`` customizes the
 commit message for :hg:`tag` regardless of ``--remove`` option.
 
 When the external editor is invoked for a commit, the corresponding
 dot-separated list of names without the ``changeset.`` prefix
 (e.g. ``commit.normal.normal``) is in the ``HGEDITFORM`` environment
 variable.
 
 In this section, items other than ``changeset`` can be referred from
 others. For example, the configuration to list committed files up
 below can be referred as ``{listupfiles}``::
 
     [committemplate]
     listupfiles = {file_adds %
        "HG: added {file}\n"     }{file_mods %
        "HG: changed {file}\n"   }{file_dels %
        "HG: removed {file}\n"   }{if(files, "",
        "HG: no files changed\n")}
 
 ``decode/encode``
 -----------------
 
 Filters for transforming files on checkout/checkin. This would
 typically be used for newline processing or other
 localization/canonicalization of files.
 
 Filters consist of a filter pattern followed by a filter command.
 Filter patterns are globs by default, rooted at the repository root.
 For example, to match any file ending in ``.txt`` in the root
 directory only, use the pattern ``*.txt``. To match any file ending
 in ``.c`` anywhere in the repository, use the pattern ``**.c``.
 For each file only the first matching filter applies.
 
 The filter command can start with a specifier, either ``pipe:`` or
 ``tempfile:``. If no specifier is given, ``pipe:`` is used by default.
 
 A ``pipe:`` command must accept data on stdin and return the transformed
 data on stdout.
 
 Pipe example::
 
   [encode]
   # uncompress gzip files on checkin to improve delta compression
   # note: not necessarily a good idea, just an example
   *.gz = pipe: gunzip
 
   [decode]
   # recompress gzip files when writing them to the working dir (we
   # can safely omit "pipe:", because it's the default)
   *.gz = gzip
 
 A ``tempfile:`` command is a template. The string ``INFILE`` is replaced
 with the name of a temporary file that contains the data to be
 filtered by the command. The string ``OUTFILE`` is replaced with the name
 of an empty temporary file, where the filtered data must be written by
 the command.
 
 .. container:: windows
 
    .. note::
 
      The tempfile mechanism is recommended for Windows systems,
      where the standard shell I/O redirection operators often have
      strange effects and may corrupt the contents of your files.
 
 This filter mechanism is used internally by the ``eol`` extension to
 translate line ending characters between Windows (CRLF) and Unix (LF)
 format. We suggest you use the ``eol`` extension for convenience.
 
 
 ``defaults``
 ------------
 
 (defaults are deprecated. Don't use them. Use aliases instead.)
 
 Use the ``[defaults]`` section to define command defaults, i.e. the
 default options/arguments to pass to the specified commands.
 
 The following example makes :hg:`log` run in verbose mode, and
 :hg:`status` show only the modified files, by default::
 
   [defaults]
   log = -v
   status = -m
 
 The actual commands, instead of their aliases, must be used when
 defining command defaults. The command defaults will also be applied
 to the aliases of the commands defined.
 
 
 ``diff``
 --------
 
 Settings used when displaying diffs. Everything except for ``unified``
 is a Boolean and defaults to False. See :hg:`help config.annotate`
 for related options for the annotate command.
 
 ``git``
     Use git extended diff format.
 
 ``nobinary``
     Omit git binary patches.
 
 ``nodates``
     Don't include dates in diff headers.
 
 ``noprefix``
     Omit 'a/' and 'b/' prefixes from filenames. Ignored in plain mode.
 
 ``showfunc``
     Show which function each change is in.
 
 ``ignorews``
     Ignore white space when comparing lines.
 
 ``ignorewsamount``
     Ignore changes in the amount of white space.
 
 ``ignoreblanklines``
     Ignore changes whose lines are all blank.
 
 ``unified``
     Number of lines of context to show.
 
 ``word-diff``
     Highlight changed words.
 
 ``email``
 ---------
 
 Settings for extensions that send email messages.
 
 ``from``
     Optional. Email address to use in "From" header and SMTP envelope
     of outgoing messages.
 
 ``to``
     Optional. Comma-separated list of recipients' email addresses.
 
 ``cc``
     Optional. Comma-separated list of carbon copy recipients'
     email addresses.
 
 ``bcc``
     Optional. Comma-separated list of blind carbon copy recipients'
     email addresses.
 
 ``method``
     Optional. Method to use to send email messages. If value is ``smtp``
     (default), use SMTP (see the ``[smtp]`` section for configuration).
     Otherwise, use as name of program to run that acts like sendmail
     (takes ``-f`` option for sender, list of recipients on command line,
     message on stdin). Normally, setting this to ``sendmail`` or
     ``/usr/sbin/sendmail`` is enough to use sendmail to send messages.
 
 ``charsets``
     Optional. Comma-separated list of character sets considered
     convenient for recipients. Addresses, headers, and parts not
     containing patches of outgoing messages will be encoded in the
     first character set to which conversion from local encoding
     (``$HGENCODING``, ``ui.fallbackencoding``) succeeds. If correct
     conversion fails, the text in question is sent as is.
     (default: '')
 
     Order of outgoing email character sets:
 
     1. ``us-ascii``: always first, regardless of settings
     2. ``email.charsets``: in order given by user
     3. ``ui.fallbackencoding``: if not in email.charsets
     4. ``$HGENCODING``: if not in email.charsets
     5. ``utf-8``: always last, regardless of settings
 
 Email example::
 
   [email]
   from = Joseph User <[e-mail]>
   method = /usr/sbin/sendmail
   # charsets for western Europeans
   # us-ascii, utf-8 omitted, as they are tried first and last
   charsets = iso-8859-1, iso-8859-15, windows-1252
 
 
 ``extensions``
 --------------
 
 Mercurial has an extension mechanism for adding new features. To
 enable an extension, create an entry for it in this section.
 
 If you know that the extension is already in Python's search path,
 you can give the name of the module, followed by ``=``, with nothing
 after the ``=``.
 
 Otherwise, give a name that you choose, followed by ``=``, followed by
 the path to the ``.py`` file (including the file name extension) that
 defines the extension.
 
 To explicitly disable an extension that is enabled in an hgrc of
 broader scope, prepend its path with ``!``, as in ``foo = !/ext/path``
 or ``foo = !`` when path is not supplied.
 
 Example for ``~/.hgrc``::
 
   [extensions]
   # (the churn extension will get loaded from Mercurial's path)
   churn =
   # (this extension will get loaded from the file specified)
   myfeature = ~/.hgext/myfeature.py
 
 
 ``format``
 ----------
 
 Configuration that controls the repository format. Newer format options are more
 powerful but incompatible with some older versions of Mercurial. Format options
 are considered at repository initialization only. You need to make a new clone
 for config change to be taken into account.
 
 For more details about repository format and version compatibility, see
 https://www.mercurial-scm.org/wiki/MissingRequirement
 
 ``usegeneraldelta``
     Enable or disable the "generaldelta" repository format which improves
     repository compression by allowing "revlog" to store delta against arbitrary
     revision instead of the previous stored one. This provides significant
     improvement for repositories with branches.
 
     Repositories with this on-disk format require Mercurial version 1.9.
 
     Enabled by default.
 
 ``dotencode``
     Enable or disable the "dotencode" repository format which enhances
     the "fncache" repository format (which has to be enabled to use
     dotencode) to avoid issues with filenames starting with ._ on
     Mac OS X and spaces on Windows.
 
     Repositories with this on-disk format require Mercurial version 1.7.
 
     Enabled by default.
 
 ``usefncache``
     Enable or disable the "fncache" repository format which enhances
     the "store" repository format (which has to be enabled to use
     fncache) to allow longer filenames and avoids using Windows
     reserved names, e.g. "nul".
 
     Repositories with this on-disk format require Mercurial version 1.1.
 
     Enabled by default.
 
 ``usestore``
     Enable or disable the "store" repository format which improves
     compatibility with systems that fold case or otherwise mangle
     filenames. Disabling this option will allow you to store longer filenames
     in some situations at the expense of compatibility.
 
     Repositories with this on-disk format require Mercurial version 0.9.4.
 
     Enabled by default.
 
+``sparse-revlog``
+    Enable or disable the ``sparse-revlog`` delta strategy. This format improves
+    delta re-use inside revlog. For very branchy repositories, it results in a
+    smaller store. For repositories with many revisions, it also helps
+    performance (by using shortened delta chains.)
+
+    Repositories with this on-disk format require Mercurial version 4.7
+
+    Enabled by default.
+
 ``graph``
 ---------
 
 Web graph view configuration. This section let you change graph
 elements display properties by branches, for instance to make the
 ``default`` branch stand out.
 
 Each line has the following format::
 
     <branch>.<argument> = <value>
 
 where ``<branch>`` is the name of the branch being
 customized. Example::
 
     [graph]
     # 2px width
     default.width = 2
     # red color
     default.color = FF0000
 
 Supported arguments:
 
 ``width``
     Set branch edges width in pixels.
 
 ``color``
     Set branch edges color in hexadecimal RGB notation.
 
 ``hooks``
 ---------
 
 Commands or Python functions that get automatically executed by
 various actions such as starting or finishing a commit. Multiple
 hooks can be run for the same action by appending a suffix to the
 action. Overriding a site-wide hook can be done by changing its
 value or setting it to an empty string.  Hooks can be prioritized
 by adding a prefix of ``priority.`` to the hook name on a new line
 and setting the priority. The default priority is 0.
 
 Example ``.hg/hgrc``::
 
   [hooks]
   # update working directory after adding changesets
   changegroup.update = hg update
   # do not use the site-wide hook
   incoming =
   incoming.email = /my/email/hook
   incoming.autobuild = /my/build/hook
   # force autobuild hook to run before other incoming hooks
   priority.incoming.autobuild = 1
 
 Most hooks are run with environment variables set that give useful
 additional information. For each hook below, the environment variables
 it is passed are listed with names in the form ``$HG_foo``. The
 ``$HG_HOOKTYPE`` and ``$HG_HOOKNAME`` variables are set for all hooks.
 They contain the type of hook which triggered the run and the full name
 of the hook in the config, respectively. In the example above, this will
 be ``$HG_HOOKTYPE=incoming`` and ``$HG_HOOKNAME=incoming.email``.
 
 .. container:: windows
 
   Some basic Unix syntax can be enabled for portability, including ``$VAR``
   and ``${VAR}`` style variables.  A ``~`` followed by ``\`` or ``/`` will
   be expanded to ``%USERPROFILE%`` to simulate a subset of tilde expansion
   on Unix.  To use a literal ``$`` or ``~``, it must be escaped with a back
   slash or inside of a strong quote.  Strong quotes will be replaced by
   double quotes after processing.
 
   This feature is enabled by adding a prefix of ``tonative.`` to the hook
   name on a new line, and setting it to ``True``.  For example::
 
     [hooks]
     incoming.autobuild = /my/build/hook
     # enable translation to cmd.exe syntax for autobuild hook
     tonative.incoming.autobuild = True
 
 ``changegroup``
   Run after a changegroup has been added via push, pull or unbundle.  The ID of
   the first new changeset is in ``$HG_NODE`` and last is in ``$HG_NODE_LAST``.
   The URL from which changes came is in ``$HG_URL``.
 
 ``commit``
   Run after a changeset has been created in the local repository. The ID
   of the newly created changeset is in ``$HG_NODE``. Parent changeset
   IDs are in ``$HG_PARENT1`` and ``$HG_PARENT2``.
 
 ``incoming``
   Run after a changeset has been pulled, pushed, or unbundled into
   the local repository. The ID of the newly arrived changeset is in
   ``$HG_NODE``. The URL that was source of the changes is in ``$HG_URL``.
 
 ``outgoing``
   Run after sending changes from the local repository to another. The ID of
   first changeset sent is in ``$HG_NODE``. The source of operation is in
   ``$HG_SOURCE``. Also see :hg:`help config.hooks.preoutgoing`.
 
 ``post-<command>``
   Run after successful invocations of the associated command. The
   contents of the command line are passed as ``$HG_ARGS`` and the result
   code in ``$HG_RESULT``. Parsed command line arguments are passed as
   ``$HG_PATS`` and ``$HG_OPTS``. These contain string representations of
   the python data internally passed to <command>. ``$HG_OPTS`` is a
   dictionary of options (with unspecified options set to their defaults).
   ``$HG_PATS`` is a list of arguments. Hook failure is ignored.
 
 ``fail-<command>``
   Run after a failed invocation of an associated command. The contents
   of the command line are passed as ``$HG_ARGS``. Parsed command line
   arguments are passed as ``$HG_PATS`` and ``$HG_OPTS``. These contain
   string representations of the python data internally passed to
   <command>. ``$HG_OPTS`` is a dictionary of options (with unspecified
   options set to their defaults). ``$HG_PATS`` is a list of arguments.
   Hook failure is ignored.
 
 ``pre-<command>``
   Run before executing the associated command. The contents of the
   command line are passed as ``$HG_ARGS``. Parsed command line arguments
   are passed as ``$HG_PATS`` and ``$HG_OPTS``. These contain string
   representations of the data internally passed to <command>. ``$HG_OPTS``
   is a dictionary of options (with unspecified options set to their
   defaults). ``$HG_PATS`` is a list of arguments. If the hook returns
   failure, the command doesn't execute and Mercurial returns the failure
   code.
 
 ``prechangegroup``
   Run before a changegroup is added via push, pull or unbundle. Exit
   status 0 allows the changegroup to proceed. A non-zero status will
   cause the push, pull or unbundle to fail. The URL from which changes
   will come is in ``$HG_URL``.
 
 ``precommit``
   Run before starting a local commit. Exit status 0 allows the
   commit to proceed. A non-zero status will cause the commit to fail.
   Parent changeset IDs are in ``$HG_PARENT1`` and ``$HG_PARENT2``.
 
 ``prelistkeys``
   Run before listing pushkeys (like bookmarks) in the
   repository. A non-zero status will cause failure. The key namespace is
   in ``$HG_NAMESPACE``.
 
 ``preoutgoing``
   Run before collecting changes to send from the local repository to
   another. A non-zero status will cause failure. This lets you prevent
   pull over HTTP or SSH. It can also prevent propagating commits (via
   local pull, push (outbound) or bundle commands), but not completely,
   since you can just copy files instead. The source of operation is in
   ``$HG_SOURCE``. If "serve", the operation is happening on behalf of a remote
   SSH or HTTP repository. If "push", "pull" or "bundle", the operation
   is happening on behalf of a repository on same system.
 
 ``prepushkey``
   Run before a pushkey (like a bookmark) is added to the
   repository. A non-zero status will cause the key to be rejected. The
   key namespace is in ``$HG_NAMESPACE``, the key is in ``$HG_KEY``,
   the old value (if any) is in ``$HG_OLD``, and the new value is in
   ``$HG_NEW``.
 
 ``pretag``
   Run before creating a tag. Exit status 0 allows the tag to be
   created. A non-zero status will cause the tag to fail. The ID of the
   changeset to tag is in ``$HG_NODE``. The name of tag is in ``$HG_TAG``. The
   tag is local if ``$HG_LOCAL=1``, or in the repository if ``$HG_LOCAL=0``.
 
 ``pretxnopen``
   Run before any new repository transaction is open. The reason for the
   transaction will be in ``$HG_TXNNAME``, and a unique identifier for the
   transaction will be in ``HG_TXNID``. A non-zero status will prevent the
   transaction from being opened.
 
 ``pretxnclose``
   Run right before the transaction is actually finalized. Any repository change
   will be visible to the hook program. This lets you validate the transaction
   content or change it. Exit status 0 allows the commit to proceed. A non-zero
   status will cause the transaction to be rolled back. The reason for the
   transaction opening will be in ``$HG_TXNNAME``, and a unique identifier for
   the transaction will be in ``HG_TXNID``. The rest of the available data will
   vary according the transaction type. New changesets will add ``$HG_NODE``
   (the ID of the first added changeset), ``$HG_NODE_LAST`` (the ID of the last
   added changeset), ``$HG_URL`` and ``$HG_SOURCE`` variables.  Bookmark and
   phase changes will set ``HG_BOOKMARK_MOVED`` and ``HG_PHASES_MOVED`` to ``1``
   respectively, etc.
 
 ``pretxnclose-bookmark``
   Run right before a bookmark change is actually finalized. Any repository
   change will be visible to the hook program. This lets you validate the
   transaction content or change it. Exit status 0 allows the commit to
   proceed. A non-zero status will cause the transaction to be rolled back.
   The name of the bookmark will be available in ``$HG_BOOKMARK``, the new
   bookmark location will be available in ``$HG_NODE`` while the previous
   location will be available in ``$HG_OLDNODE``. In case of a bookmark
   creation ``$HG_OLDNODE`` will be empty. In case of deletion ``$HG_NODE``
   will be empty.
   In addition, the reason for the transaction opening will be in
   ``$HG_TXNNAME``, and a unique identifier for the transaction will be in
   ``HG_TXNID``.
 
 ``pretxnclose-phase``
   Run right before a phase change is actually finalized. Any repository change
   will be visible to the hook program. This lets you validate the transaction
   content or change it. Exit status 0 allows the commit to proceed.  A non-zero
   status will cause the transaction to be rolled back. The hook is called
   multiple times, once for each revision affected by a phase change.
   The affected node is available in ``$HG_NODE``, the phase in ``$HG_PHASE``
   while the previous ``$HG_OLDPHASE``. In case of new node, ``$HG_OLDPHASE``
   will be empty.  In addition, the reason for the transaction opening will be in
   ``$HG_TXNNAME``, and a unique identifier for the transaction will be in
   ``HG_TXNID``. The hook is also run for newly added revisions. In this case
   the ``$HG_OLDPHASE`` entry will be empty.
 
 ``txnclose``
   Run after any repository transaction has been committed. At this
   point, the transaction can no longer be rolled back. The hook will run
   after the lock is released. See :hg:`help config.hooks.pretxnclose` for
   details about available variables.
 
 ``txnclose-bookmark``
   Run after any bookmark change has been committed. At this point, the
   transaction can no longer be rolled back. The hook will run after the lock
   is released. See :hg:`help config.hooks.pretxnclose-bookmark` for details
   about available variables.
 
 ``txnclose-phase``
   Run after any phase change has been committed. At this point, the
   transaction can no longer be rolled back. The hook will run after the lock
   is released. See :hg:`help config.hooks.pretxnclose-phase` for details about
   available variables.
 
 ``txnabort``
   Run when a transaction is aborted. See :hg:`help config.hooks.pretxnclose`
   for details about available variables.
 
 ``pretxnchangegroup``
   Run after a changegroup has been added via push, pull or unbundle, but before
   the transaction has been committed. The changegroup is visible to the hook
   program. This allows validation of incoming changes before accepting them.
   The ID of the first new changeset is in ``$HG_NODE`` and last is in
   ``$HG_NODE_LAST``. Exit status 0 allows the transaction to commit. A non-zero
   status will cause the transaction to be rolled back, and the push, pull or
   unbundle will fail. The URL that was the source of changes is in ``$HG_URL``.
 
 ``pretxncommit``
   Run after a changeset has been created, but before the transaction is
   committed. The changeset is visible to the hook program. This allows
   validation of the commit message and changes. Exit status 0 allows the
   commit to proceed. A non-zero status will cause the transaction to
   be rolled back. The ID of the new changeset is in ``$HG_NODE``. The parent
   changeset IDs are in ``$HG_PARENT1`` and ``$HG_PARENT2``.
 
 ``preupdate``
   Run before updating the working directory. Exit status 0 allows
   the update to proceed. A non-zero status will prevent the update.
   The changeset ID of first new parent is in ``$HG_PARENT1``. If updating to a
   merge, the ID of second new parent is in ``$HG_PARENT2``.
 
 ``listkeys``
   Run after listing pushkeys (like bookmarks) in the repository. The
   key namespace is in ``$HG_NAMESPACE``. ``$HG_VALUES`` is a
   dictionary containing the keys and values.
 
 ``pushkey``
   Run after a pushkey (like a bookmark) is added to the
   repository. The key namespace is in ``$HG_NAMESPACE``, the key is in
   ``$HG_KEY``, the old value (if any) is in ``$HG_OLD``, and the new
   value is in ``$HG_NEW``.
 
 ``tag``
   Run after a tag is created. The ID of the tagged changeset is in ``$HG_NODE``.
   The name of tag is in ``$HG_TAG``. The tag is local if ``$HG_LOCAL=1``, or in
   the repository if ``$HG_LOCAL=0``.
 
 ``update``
   Run after updating the working directory. The changeset ID of first
   new parent is in ``$HG_PARENT1``. If updating to a merge, the ID of second new
   parent is in ``$HG_PARENT2``. If the update succeeded, ``$HG_ERROR=0``. If the
   update failed (e.g. because conflicts were not resolved), ``$HG_ERROR=1``.
 
 .. note::
 
    It is generally better to use standard hooks rather than the
    generic pre- and post- command hooks, as they are guaranteed to be
    called in the appropriate contexts for influencing transactions.
    Also, hooks like "commit" will be called in all contexts that
    generate a commit (e.g. tag) and not just the commit command.
 
 .. note::
 
    Environment variables with empty values may not be passed to
    hooks on platforms such as Windows. As an example, ``$HG_PARENT2``
    will have an empty value under Unix-like platforms for non-merge
    changesets, while it will not be available at all under Windows.
 
 The syntax for Python hooks is as follows::
 
   hookname = python:modulename.submodule.callable
   hookname = python:/path/to/python/module.py:callable
 
 Python hooks are run within the Mercurial process. Each hook is
 called with at least three keyword arguments: a ui object (keyword
 ``ui``), a repository object (keyword ``repo``), and a ``hooktype``
 keyword that tells what kind of hook is used. Arguments listed as
 environment variables above are passed as keyword arguments, with no
 ``HG_`` prefix, and names in lower case.
 
 If a Python hook returns a "true" value or raises an exception, this
 is treated as a failure.
 
 
 ``hostfingerprints``
 --------------------
 
 (Deprecated. Use ``[hostsecurity]``'s ``fingerprints`` options instead.)
 
 Fingerprints of the certificates of known HTTPS servers.
 
 A HTTPS connection to a server with a fingerprint configured here will
 only succeed if the servers certificate matches the fingerprint.
 This is very similar to how ssh known hosts works.
 
 The fingerprint is the SHA-1 hash value of the DER encoded certificate.
 Multiple values can be specified (separated by spaces or commas). This can
 be used to define both old and new fingerprints while a host transitions
 to a new certificate.
 
 The CA chain and web.cacerts is not used for servers with a fingerprint.
 
 For example::
 
     [hostfingerprints]
     hg.intevation.de = fc:e2:8d:d9:51:cd:cb:c1:4d:18:6b:b7:44:8d:49:72:57:e6:cd:33
     hg.intevation.org = fc:e2:8d:d9:51:cd:cb:c1:4d:18:6b:b7:44:8d:49:72:57:e6:cd:33
 
 ``hostsecurity``
 ----------------
 
 Used to specify global and per-host security settings for connecting to
 other machines.
 
 The following options control default behavior for all hosts.
 
 ``ciphers``
     Defines the cryptographic ciphers to use for connections.
 
     Value must be a valid OpenSSL Cipher List Format as documented at
     https://www.openssl.org/docs/manmaster/apps/ciphers.html#CIPHER-LIST-FORMAT.
 
     This setting is for advanced users only. Setting to incorrect values
     can significantly lower connection security or decrease performance.
     You have been warned.
 
     This option requires Python 2.7.
 
 ``minimumprotocol``
     Defines the minimum channel encryption protocol to use.
 
     By default, the highest version of TLS supported by both client and server
     is used.
 
     Allowed values are: ``tls1.0``, ``tls1.1``, ``tls1.2``.
 
     When running on an old Python version, only ``tls1.0`` is allowed since
     old versions of Python only support up to TLS 1.0.
 
     When running a Python that supports modern TLS versions, the default is
     ``tls1.1``. ``tls1.0`` can still be used to allow TLS 1.0. However, this
     weakens security and should only be used as a feature of last resort if
     a server does not support TLS 1.1+.
 
 Options in the ``[hostsecurity]`` section can have the form
 ``hostname``:``setting``. This allows multiple settings to be defined on a
 per-host basis.
 
 The following per-host settings can be defined.
 
 ``ciphers``
     This behaves like ``ciphers`` as described above except it only applies
     to the host on which it is defined.
 
 ``fingerprints``
     A list of hashes of the DER encoded peer/remote certificate. Values have
     the form ``algorithm``:``fingerprint``. e.g.
     ``sha256:c3ab8ff13720e8ad9047dd39466b3c8974e592c2fa383d4a3960714caef0c4f2``.
     In addition, colons (``:``) can appear in the fingerprint part.
 
     The following algorithms/prefixes are supported: ``sha1``, ``sha256``,
     ``sha512``.
 
     Use of ``sha256`` or ``sha512`` is preferred.
 
     If a fingerprint is specified, the CA chain is not validated for this
     host and Mercurial will require the remote certificate to match one
     of the fingerprints specified. This means if the server updates its
     certificate, Mercurial will abort until a new fingerprint is defined.
     This can provide stronger security than traditional CA-based validation
     at the expense of convenience.
 
     This option takes precedence over ``verifycertsfile``.
 
 ``minimumprotocol``
     This behaves like ``minimumprotocol`` as described above except it
     only applies to the host on which it is defined.
 
 ``verifycertsfile``
     Path to file a containing a list of PEM encoded certificates used to
     verify the server certificate. Environment variables and ``~user``
     constructs are expanded in the filename.
 
     The server certificate or the certificate's certificate authority (CA)
     must match a certificate from this file or certificate verification
     will fail and connections to the server will be refused.
 
     If defined, only certificates provided by this file will be used:
     ``web.cacerts`` and any system/default certificates will not be
     used.
 
     This option has no effect if the per-host ``fingerprints`` option
     is set.
 
     The format of the file is as follows::
 
         -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
         ... (certificate in base64 PEM encoding) ...
         -----END CERTIFICATE-----
         -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
         ... (certificate in base64 PEM encoding) ...
         -----END CERTIFICATE-----
 
 For example::
 
     [hostsecurity]
     hg.example.com:fingerprints = sha256:c3ab8ff13720e8ad9047dd39466b3c8974e592c2fa383d4a3960714caef0c4f2
     hg2.example.com:fingerprints = sha1:914f1aff87249c09b6859b88b1906d30756491ca, sha1:fc:e2:8d:d9:51:cd:cb:c1:4d:18:6b:b7:44:8d:49:72:57:e6:cd:33
     hg3.example.com:fingerprints = sha256:9a:b0:dc:e2:75:ad:8a:b7:84:58:e5:1f:07:32:f1:87:e6:bd:24:22:af:b7:ce:8e:9c:b4:10:cf:b9:f4:0e:d2
     foo.example.com:verifycertsfile = /etc/ssl/trusted-ca-certs.pem
 
 To change the default minimum protocol version to TLS 1.2 but to allow TLS 1.1
 when connecting to ``hg.example.com``::
 
     [hostsecurity]
     minimumprotocol = tls1.2
     hg.example.com:minimumprotocol = tls1.1
 
 ``http_proxy``
 --------------
 
 Used to access web-based Mercurial repositories through a HTTP
 proxy.
 
 ``host``
     Host name and (optional) port of the proxy server, for example
     "myproxy:8000".
 
 ``no``
     Optional. Comma-separated list of host names that should bypass
     the proxy.
 
 ``passwd``
     Optional. Password to authenticate with at the proxy server.
 
 ``user``
     Optional. User name to authenticate with at the proxy server.
 
 ``always``
     Optional. Always use the proxy, even for localhost and any entries
     in ``http_proxy.no``. (default: False)
 
 ``http``
 ----------
 
 Used to configure access to Mercurial repositories via HTTP.
 
 ``timeout``
     If set, blocking operations will timeout after that many seconds.
     (default: None)
 
 ``merge``
 ---------
 
 This section specifies behavior during merges and updates.
 
 ``checkignored``
    Controls behavior when an ignored file on disk has the same name as a tracked
    file in the changeset being merged or updated to, and has different
    contents. Options are ``abort``, ``warn`` and ``ignore``. With ``abort``,
    abort on such files. With ``warn``, warn on such files and back them up as
    ``.orig``. With ``ignore``, don't print a warning and back them up as
    ``.orig``. (default: ``abort``)
 
 ``checkunknown``
    Controls behavior when an unknown file that isn't ignored has the same name
    as a tracked file in the changeset being merged or updated to, and has
    different contents. Similar to ``merge.checkignored``, except for files that
    are not ignored. (default: ``abort``)
 
 ``on-failure``
    When set to ``continue`` (the default), the merge process attempts to
    merge all unresolved files using the merge chosen tool, regardless of
    whether previous file merge attempts during the process succeeded or not.
    Setting this to ``prompt`` will prompt after any merge failure continue
    or halt the merge process. Setting this to ``halt`` will automatically
    halt the merge process on any merge tool failure. The merge process
    can be restarted by using the ``resolve`` command. When a merge is
    halted, the repository is left in a normal ``unresolved`` merge state.
    (default: ``continue``)
 
 ``strict-capability-check``
    Whether capabilities of internal merge tools are checked strictly
    or not, while examining rules to decide merge tool to be used.
    (default: False)
 
 ``merge-patterns``
 ------------------
 
 This section specifies merge tools to associate with particular file
 patterns. Tools matched here will take precedence over the default
 merge tool. Patterns are globs by default, rooted at the repository
 root.
 
 Example::
 
   [merge-patterns]
   **.c = kdiff3
   **.jpg = myimgmerge
 
 ``merge-tools``
 ---------------
 
 This section configures external merge tools to use for file-level
 merges. This section has likely been preconfigured at install time.
 Use :hg:`config merge-tools` to check the existing configuration.
 Also see :hg:`help merge-tools` for more details.
 
 Example ``~/.hgrc``::
 
   [merge-tools]
   # Override stock tool location
   kdiff3.executable = ~/bin/kdiff3
   # Specify command line
   kdiff3.args = $base $local $other -o $output
   # Give higher priority
   kdiff3.priority = 1
 
   # Changing the priority of preconfigured tool
   meld.priority = 0
 
   # Disable a preconfigured tool
   vimdiff.disabled = yes
 
   # Define new tool
   myHtmlTool.args = -m $local $other $base $output
   myHtmlTool.regkey = Software\FooSoftware\HtmlMerge
   myHtmlTool.priority = 1
 
 Supported arguments:
 
 ``priority``
   The priority in which to evaluate this tool.
   (default: 0)
 
 ``executable``
   Either just the name of the executable or its pathname.
 
   .. container:: windows
 
     On Windows, the path can use environment variables with ${ProgramFiles}
     syntax.
 
   (default: the tool name)
 
 ``args``
   The arguments to pass to the tool executable. You can refer to the
   files being merged as well as the output file through these
   variables: ``$base``, ``$local``, ``$other``, ``$output``.
 
   The meaning of ``$local`` and ``$other`` can vary depending on which action is
   being performed. During an update or merge, ``$local`` represents the original
   state of the file, while ``$other`` represents the commit you are updating to or
   the commit you are merging with. During a rebase, ``$local`` represents the
   destination of the rebase, and ``$other`` represents the commit being rebased.
 
   Some operations define custom labels to assist with identifying the revisions,
   accessible via ``$labellocal``, ``$labelother``, and ``$labelbase``. If custom
   labels are not available, these will be ``local``, ``other``, and ``base``,
   respectively.
   (default: ``$local $base $other``)
 
 ``premerge``
   Attempt to run internal non-interactive 3-way merge tool before
   launching external tool.  Options are ``true``, ``false``, ``keep`` or
   ``keep-merge3``. The ``keep`` option will leave markers in the file if the
   premerge fails. The ``keep-merge3`` will do the same but include information
   about the base of the merge in the marker (see internal :merge3 in
   :hg:`help merge-tools`).
   (default: True)
 
 ``binary``
   This tool can merge binary files. (default: False, unless tool
   was selected by file pattern match)
 
 ``symlink``
   This tool can merge symlinks. (default: False)
 
 ``check``
   A list of merge success-checking options:
 
   ``changed``
     Ask whether merge was successful when the merged file shows no changes.
   ``conflicts``
     Check whether there are conflicts even though the tool reported success.
   ``prompt``
     Always prompt for merge success, regardless of success reported by tool.
 
 ``fixeol``
   Attempt to fix up EOL changes caused by the merge tool.
   (default: False)
 
 ``gui``
   This tool requires a graphical interface to run. (default: False)
 
 ``mergemarkers``
   Controls whether the labels passed via ``$labellocal``, ``$labelother``, and
   ``$labelbase`` are ``detailed`` (respecting ``mergemarkertemplate``) or
   ``basic``. If ``premerge`` is ``keep`` or ``keep-merge3``, the conflict
   markers generated during premerge will be ``detailed`` if either this option or
   the corresponding option in the ``[ui]`` section is ``detailed``.
   (default: ``basic``)
 
 ``mergemarkertemplate``
   This setting can be used to override ``mergemarkertemplate`` from the ``[ui]``
   section on a per-tool basis; this applies to the ``$label``-prefixed variables
   and to the conflict markers that are generated if ``premerge`` is ``keep` or
   ``keep-merge3``. See the corresponding variable in ``[ui]`` for more
   information.
 
 .. container:: windows
 
   ``regkey``
     Windows registry key which describes install location of this
     tool. Mercurial will search for this key first under
     ``HKEY_CURRENT_USER`` and then under ``HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE``.
     (default: None)
 
   ``regkeyalt``
     An alternate Windows registry key to try if the first key is not
     found.  The alternate key uses the same ``regname`` and ``regappend``
     semantics of the primary key.  The most common use for this key
     is to search for 32bit applications on 64bit operating systems.
     (default: None)
 
   ``regname``
     Name of value to read from specified registry key.
     (default: the unnamed (default) value)
 
   ``regappend``
     String to append to the value read from the registry, typically
     the executable name of the tool.
     (default: None)
 
 ``pager``
 ---------
 
 Setting used to control when to paginate and with what external tool. See
 :hg:`help pager` for details.
 
 ``pager``
     Define the external tool used as pager.
 
     If no pager is set, Mercurial uses the environment variable $PAGER.
     If neither pager.pager, nor $PAGER is set, a default pager will be
     used, typically `less` on Unix and `more` on Windows. Example::
 
       [pager]
       pager = less -FRX
 
 ``ignore``
     List of commands to disable the pager for. Example::
 
       [pager]
       ignore = version, help, update
 
 ``patch``
 ---------
 
 Settings used when applying patches, for instance through the 'import'
 command or with Mercurial Queues extension.
 
 ``eol``
     When set to 'strict' patch content and patched files end of lines
     are preserved. When set to ``lf`` or ``crlf``, both files end of
     lines are ignored when patching and the result line endings are
     normalized to either LF (Unix) or CRLF (Windows). When set to
     ``auto``, end of lines are again ignored while patching but line
     endings in patched files are normalized to their original setting
     on a per-file basis. If target file does not exist or has no end
     of line, patch line endings are preserved.
     (default: strict)
 
 ``fuzz``
     The number of lines of 'fuzz' to allow when applying patches. This
     controls how much context the patcher is allowed to ignore when
     trying to apply a patch.
     (default: 2)
 
 ``paths``
 ---------
 
 Assigns symbolic names and behavior to repositories.
 
 Options are symbolic names defining the URL or directory that is the
 location of the repository. Example::
 
     [paths]
     my_server = https://example.com/my_repo
     local_path = /home/me/repo
 
 These symbolic names can be used from the command line. To pull
 from ``my_server``: :hg:`pull my_server`. To push to ``local_path``:
 :hg:`push local_path`.
 
 Options containing colons (``:``) denote sub-options that can influence
 behavior for that specific path. Example::
 
     [paths]
     my_server = https://example.com/my_path
     my_server:pushurl = ssh://example.com/my_path
 
 The following sub-options can be defined:
 
 ``pushurl``
    The URL to use for push operations. If not defined, the location
    defined by the path's main entry is used.
 
 ``pushrev``
    A revset defining which revisions to push by default.
 
    When :hg:`push` is executed without a ``-r`` argument, the revset
    defined by this sub-option is evaluated to determine what to push.
 
    For example, a value of ``.`` will push the working directory's
    revision by default.
 
    Revsets specifying bookmarks will not result in the bookmark being
    pushed.
 
 The following special named paths exist:
 
 ``default``
    The URL or directory to use when no source or remote is specified.
 
    :hg:`clone` will automatically define this path to the location the
    repository was cloned from.
 
 ``default-push``
    (deprecated) The URL or directory for the default :hg:`push` location.
    ``default:pushurl`` should be used instead.
 
 ``phases``
 ----------
 
 Specifies default handling of phases. See :hg:`help phases` for more
 information about working with phases.
 
 ``publish``
     Controls draft phase behavior when working as a server. When true,
     pushed changesets are set to public in both client and server and
     pulled or cloned changesets are set to public in the client.
     (default: True)
 
 ``new-commit``
     Phase of newly-created commits.
     (default: draft)
 
 ``checksubrepos``
     Check the phase of the current revision of each subrepository. Allowed
     values are "ignore", "follow" and "abort". For settings other than
     "ignore", the phase of the current revision of each subrepository is
     checked before committing the parent repository. If any of those phases is
     greater than the phase of the parent repository (e.g. if a subrepo is in a
     "secret" phase while the parent repo is in "draft" phase), the commit is
     either aborted (if checksubrepos is set to "abort") or the higher phase is
     used for the parent repository commit (if set to "follow").
     (default: follow)
 
 
 ``profiling``
 -------------
 
 Specifies profiling type, format, and file output. Two profilers are
 supported: an instrumenting profiler (named ``ls``), and a sampling
 profiler (named ``stat``).
 
 In this section description, 'profiling data' stands for the raw data
 collected during profiling, while 'profiling report' stands for a
 statistical text report generated from the profiling data.
 
 ``enabled``
     Enable the profiler.
     (default: false)
 
     This is equivalent to passing ``--profile`` on the command line.
 
 ``type``
     The type of profiler to use.
     (default: stat)
 
     ``ls``
       Use Python's built-in instrumenting profiler. This profiler
       works on all platforms, but each line number it reports is the
       first line of a function. This restriction makes it difficult to
       identify the expensive parts of a non-trivial function.
     ``stat``
       Use a statistical profiler, statprof. This profiler is most
       useful for profiling commands that run for longer than about 0.1
       seconds.
 
 ``format``
     Profiling format.  Specific to the ``ls`` instrumenting profiler.
     (default: text)
 
     ``text``
       Generate a profiling report. When saving to a file, it should be
       noted that only the report is saved, and the profiling data is
       not kept.
     ``kcachegrind``
       Format profiling data for kcachegrind use: when saving to a
       file, the generated file can directly be loaded into
       kcachegrind.
 
 ``statformat``
     Profiling format for the ``stat`` profiler.
     (default: hotpath)
 
     ``hotpath``
       Show a tree-based display containing the hot path of execution (where
       most time was spent).
     ``bymethod``
       Show a table of methods ordered by how frequently they are active.
     ``byline``
       Show a table of lines in files ordered by how frequently they are active.
     ``json``
       Render profiling data as JSON.
 
 ``frequency``
     Sampling frequency.  Specific to the ``stat`` sampling profiler.
     (default: 1000)
 
 ``output``
     File path where profiling data or report should be saved. If the
     file exists, it is replaced. (default: None, data is printed on
     stderr)
 
 ``sort``
     Sort field.  Specific to the ``ls`` instrumenting profiler.
     One of ``callcount``, ``reccallcount``, ``totaltime`` and
     ``inlinetime``.
     (default: inlinetime)
 
 ``time-track``
     Control if the stat profiler track ``cpu`` or ``real`` time.
     (default: ``cpu`` on Windows, otherwise ``real``)
 
 ``limit``
     Number of lines to show. Specific to the ``ls`` instrumenting profiler.
     (default: 30)
 
 ``nested``
     Show at most this number of lines of drill-down info after each main entry.
     This can help explain the difference between Total and Inline.
     Specific to the ``ls`` instrumenting profiler.
     (default: 0)
 
 ``showmin``
     Minimum fraction of samples an entry must have for it to be displayed.
     Can be specified as a float between ``0.0`` and ``1.0`` or can have a
     ``%`` afterwards to allow values up to ``100``. e.g. ``5%``.
 
     Only used by the ``stat`` profiler.
 
     For the ``hotpath`` format, default is ``0.05``.
     For the ``chrome`` format, default is ``0.005``.
 
     The option is unused on other formats.
 
 ``showmax``
     Maximum fraction of samples an entry can have before it is ignored in
     display. Values format is the same as ``showmin``.
 
     Only used by the ``stat`` profiler.
 
     For the ``chrome`` format, default is ``0.999``.
 
     The option is unused on other formats.
 
 ``progress``
 ------------
 
 Mercurial commands can draw progress bars that are as informative as
 possible. Some progress bars only offer indeterminate information, while others
 have a definite end point.
 
 ``debug``
     Whether to print debug info when updating the progress bar. (default: False)
 
 ``delay``
     Number of seconds (float) before showing the progress bar. (default: 3)
 
 ``changedelay``
     Minimum delay before showing a new topic. When set to less than 3 * refresh,
     that value will be used instead. (default: 1)
 
 ``estimateinterval``
     Maximum sampling interval in seconds for speed and estimated time
     calculation. (default: 60)
 
 ``refresh``
     Time in seconds between refreshes of the progress bar. (default: 0.1)
 
 ``format``
     Format of the progress bar.
 
     Valid entries for the format field are ``topic``, ``bar``, ``number``,
     ``unit``, ``estimate``, ``speed``, and ``item``. ``item`` defaults to the
     last 20 characters of the item, but this can be changed by adding either
     ``-<num>`` which would take the last num characters, or ``+<num>`` for the
     first num characters.
 
     (default: topic bar number estimate)
 
 ``width``
     If set, the maximum width of the progress information (that is, min(width,
     term width) will be used).
 
 ``clear-complete``
     Clear the progress bar after it's done. (default: True)
 
 ``disable``
     If true, don't show a progress bar.
 
 ``assume-tty``
     If true, ALWAYS show a progress bar, unless disable is given.
 
 ``rebase``
 ----------
 
 ``evolution.allowdivergence``
     Default to False, when True allow creating divergence when performing
     rebase of obsolete changesets.
 
 ``revsetalias``
 ---------------
 
 Alias definitions for revsets. See :hg:`help revsets` for details.
 
 ``rewrite``
 -----------
 
 ``backup-bundle``
     Whether to save stripped changesets to a bundle file. (default: True)
 
 ``update-timestamp``
     If true, updates the date and time of the changeset to current. It is only
     applicable for hg amend in current version.
 
 ``storage``
 -----------
 
 Control the strategy Mercurial uses internally to store history. Options in this
 category impact performance and repository size.
 
 ``revlog.optimize-delta-parent-choice``
     When storing a merge revision, both parents will be equally considered as
     a possible delta base. This results in better delta selection and improved
     revlog compression. This option is enabled by default.
 
     Turning this option off can result in large increase of repository size for
     repository with many merges.
 
 ``server``
 ----------
 
 Controls generic server settings.
 
 ``bookmarks-pushkey-compat``
     Trigger pushkey hook when being pushed bookmark updates. This config exist
     for compatibility purpose (default to True)
 
     If you use ``pushkey`` and ``pre-pushkey`` hooks to control bookmark
     movement we recommend you migrate them to ``txnclose-bookmark`` and
     ``pretxnclose-bookmark``.
 
 ``compressionengines``
     List of compression engines and their relative priority to advertise
     to clients.
 
     The order of compression engines determines their priority, the first
     having the highest priority. If a compression engine is not listed
     here, it won't be advertised to clients.
 
     If not set (the default), built-in defaults are used. Run
     :hg:`debuginstall` to list available compression engines and their
     default wire protocol priority.
 
     Older Mercurial clients only support zlib compression and this setting
     has no effect for legacy clients.
 
 ``uncompressed``
     Whether to allow clients to clone a repository using the
     uncompressed streaming protocol. This transfers about 40% more
     data than a regular clone, but uses less memory and CPU on both
     server and client. Over a LAN (100 Mbps or better) or a very fast
     WAN, an uncompressed streaming clone is a lot faster (~10x) than a
     regular clone. Over most WAN connections (anything slower than
     about 6 Mbps), uncompressed streaming is slower, because of the
     extra data transfer overhead. This mode will also temporarily hold
     the write lock while determining what data to transfer.
     (default: True)
 
 ``uncompressedallowsecret``
     Whether to allow stream clones when the repository contains secret
     changesets. (default: False)
 
 ``preferuncompressed``
     When set, clients will try to use the uncompressed streaming
     protocol. (default: False)
 
 ``disablefullbundle``
     When set, servers will refuse attempts to do pull-based clones.
     If this option is set, ``preferuncompressed`` and/or clone bundles
     are highly recommended. Partial clones will still be allowed.
     (default: False)
 
 ``streamunbundle``
     When set, servers will apply data sent from the client directly,
     otherwise it will be written to a temporary file first. This option
     effectively prevents concurrent pushes.
 
 ``pullbundle``
     When set, the server will check pullbundle.manifest for bundles
     covering the requested heads and common nodes. The first matching
     entry will be streamed to the client.
 
     For HTTP transport, the stream will still use zlib compression
     for older clients.
 
 ``concurrent-push-mode``
     Level of allowed race condition between two pushing clients.
 
     - 'strict': push is abort if another client touched the repository
       while the push was preparing. (default)
     - 'check-related': push is only aborted if it affects head that got also
       affected while the push was preparing.
 
     This requires compatible client (version 4.3 and later). Old client will
     use 'strict'.
 
 ``validate``
     Whether to validate the completeness of pushed changesets by
     checking that all new file revisions specified in manifests are
     present. (default: False)
 
 ``maxhttpheaderlen``
     Instruct HTTP clients not to send request headers longer than this
     many bytes. (default: 1024)
 
 ``bundle1``
     Whether to allow clients to push and pull using the legacy bundle1
     exchange format. (default: True)
 
 ``bundle1gd``
     Like ``bundle1`` but only used if the repository is using the
     *generaldelta* storage format. (default: True)
 
 ``bundle1.push``
     Whether to allow clients to push using the legacy bundle1 exchange
     format. (default: True)
 
 ``bundle1gd.push``
     Like ``bundle1.push`` but only used if the repository is using the
     *generaldelta* storage format. (default: True)
 
 ``bundle1.pull``
     Whether to allow clients to pull using the legacy bundle1 exchange
     format. (default: True)
 
 ``bundle1gd.pull``
     Like ``bundle1.pull`` but only used if the repository is using the
     *generaldelta* storage format. (default: True)
 
     Large repositories using the *generaldelta* storage format should
     consider setting this option because converting *generaldelta*
     repositories to the exchange format required by the bundle1 data
     format can consume a lot of CPU.
 
 ``bundle2.stream``
     Whether to allow clients to pull using the bundle2 streaming protocol.
     (default: True)
 
 ``zliblevel``
     Integer between ``-1`` and ``9`` that controls the zlib compression level
     for wire protocol commands that send zlib compressed output (notably the
     commands that send repository history data).
 
     The default (``-1``) uses the default zlib compression level, which is
     likely equivalent to ``6``. ``0`` means no compression. ``9`` means
     maximum compression.
 
     Setting this option allows server operators to make trade-offs between
     bandwidth and CPU used. Lowering the compression lowers CPU utilization
     but sends more bytes to clients.
 
     This option only impacts the HTTP server.
 
 ``zstdlevel``
     Integer between ``1`` and ``22`` that controls the zstd compression level
     for wire protocol commands. ``1`` is the minimal amount of compression and
     ``22`` is the highest amount of compression.
 
     The default (``3``) should be significantly faster than zlib while likely
     delivering better compression ratios.
 
     This option only impacts the HTTP server.
 
     See also ``server.zliblevel``.
 
 ``smtp``
 --------
 
 Configuration for extensions that need to send email messages.
 
 ``host``
     Host name of mail server, e.g. "mail.example.com".
 
 ``port``
     Optional. Port to connect to on mail server. (default: 465 if
     ``tls`` is smtps; 25 otherwise)
 
 ``tls``
     Optional. Method to enable TLS when connecting to mail server: starttls,
     smtps or none. (default: none)
 
 ``username``
     Optional. User name for authenticating with the SMTP server.
     (default: None)
 
 ``password``
     Optional. Password for authenticating with the SMTP server. If not
     specified, interactive sessions will prompt the user for a
     password; non-interactive sessions will fail. (default: None)
 
 ``local_hostname``
     Optional. The hostname that the sender can use to identify
     itself to the MTA.
 
 
 ``subpaths``
 ------------
 
 Subrepository source URLs can go stale if a remote server changes name
 or becomes temporarily unavailable. This section lets you define
 rewrite rules of the form::
 
     <pattern> = <replacement>
 
 where ``pattern`` is a regular expression matching a subrepository
 source URL and ``replacement`` is the replacement string used to
 rewrite it. Groups can be matched in ``pattern`` and referenced in
 ``replacements``. For instance::
 
     http://server/(.*)-hg/ = http://hg.server/\1/
 
 rewrites ``http://server/foo-hg/`` into ``http://hg.server/foo/``.
 
 Relative subrepository paths are first made absolute, and the
 rewrite rules are then applied on the full (absolute) path. If ``pattern``
 doesn't match the full path, an attempt is made to apply it on the
 relative path alone. The rules are applied in definition order.
 
 ``subrepos``
 ------------
 
 This section contains options that control the behavior of the
 subrepositories feature. See also :hg:`help subrepos`.
 
 Security note: auditing in Mercurial is known to be insufficient to
 prevent clone-time code execution with carefully constructed Git
 subrepos. It is unknown if a similar detect is present in Subversion
 subrepos. Both Git and Subversion subrepos are disabled by default
 out of security concerns. These subrepo types can be enabled using
 the respective options below.
 
 ``allowed``
     Whether subrepositories are allowed in the working directory.
 
     When false, commands involving subrepositories (like :hg:`update`)
     will fail for all subrepository types.
     (default: true)
 
 ``hg:allowed``
     Whether Mercurial subrepositories are allowed in the working
     directory. This option only has an effect if ``subrepos.allowed``
     is true.
     (default: true)
 
 ``git:allowed``
     Whether Git subrepositories are allowed in the working directory.
     This option only has an effect if ``subrepos.allowed`` is true.
 
     See the security note above before enabling Git subrepos.
     (default: false)
 
 ``svn:allowed``
     Whether Subversion subrepositories are allowed in the working
     directory. This option only has an effect if ``subrepos.allowed``
     is true.
 
     See the security note above before enabling Subversion subrepos.
     (default: false)
 
 ``templatealias``
 -----------------
 
 Alias definitions for templates. See :hg:`help templates` for details.
 
 ``templates``
 -------------
 
 Use the ``[templates]`` section to define template strings.
 See :hg:`help templates` for details.
 
 ``trusted``
 -----------
 
 Mercurial will not use the settings in the
 ``.hg/hgrc`` file from a repository if it doesn't belong to a trusted
 user or to a trusted group, as various hgrc features allow arbitrary
 commands to be run. This issue is often encountered when configuring
 hooks or extensions for shared repositories or servers. However,
 the web interface will use some safe settings from the ``[web]``
 section.
 
 This section specifies what users and groups are trusted. The
 current user is always trusted. To trust everybody, list a user or a
 group with name ``*``. These settings must be placed in an
 *already-trusted file* to take effect, such as ``$HOME/.hgrc`` of the
 user or service running Mercurial.
 
 ``users``
   Comma-separated list of trusted users.
 
 ``groups``
   Comma-separated list of trusted groups.
 
 
 ``ui``
 ------
 
 User interface controls.
 
 ``archivemeta``
     Whether to include the .hg_archival.txt file containing meta data
     (hashes for the repository base and for tip) in archives created
     by the :hg:`archive` command or downloaded via hgweb.
     (default: True)
 
 ``askusername``
     Whether to prompt for a username when committing. If True, and
     neither ``$HGUSER`` nor ``$EMAIL`` has been specified, then the user will
     be prompted to enter a username. If no username is entered, the
     default ``USER@HOST`` is used instead.
     (default: False)
 
 ``clonebundles``
     Whether the "clone bundles" feature is enabled.
 
     When enabled, :hg:`clone` may download and apply a server-advertised
     bundle file from a URL instead of using the normal exchange mechanism.
 
     This can likely result in faster and more reliable clones.
 
     (default: True)
 
 ``clonebundlefallback``
     Whether failure to apply an advertised "clone bundle" from a server
     should result in fallback to a regular clone.
 
     This is disabled by default because servers advertising "clone
     bundles" often do so to reduce server load. If advertised bundles
     start mass failing and clients automatically fall back to a regular
     clone, this would add significant and unexpected load to the server
     since the server is expecting clone operations to be offloaded to
     pre-generated bundles. Failing fast (the default behavior) ensures
     clients don't overwhelm the server when "clone bundle" application
     fails.
 
     (default: False)
 
 ``clonebundleprefers``
     Defines preferences for which "clone bundles" to use.
 
     Servers advertising "clone bundles" may advertise multiple available
     bundles. Each bundle may have different attributes, such as the bundle
     type and compression format. This option is used to prefer a particular
     bundle over another.
 
     The following keys are defined by Mercurial:
 
     BUNDLESPEC
        A bundle type specifier. These are strings passed to :hg:`bundle -t`.
        e.g. ``gzip-v2`` or ``bzip2-v1``.
 
     COMPRESSION
        The compression format of the bundle. e.g. ``gzip`` and ``bzip2``.
 
     Server operators may define custom keys.
 
     Example values: ``COMPRESSION=bzip2``,
     ``BUNDLESPEC=gzip-v2, COMPRESSION=gzip``.
 
     By default, the first bundle advertised by the server is used.
 
 ``color``
     When to colorize output. Possible value are Boolean ("yes" or "no"), or
     "debug", or "always". (default: "yes"). "yes" will use color whenever it
     seems possible. See :hg:`help color` for details.
 
 ``commitsubrepos``
     Whether to commit modified subrepositories when committing the
     parent repository. If False and one subrepository has uncommitted
     changes, abort the commit.
     (default: False)
 
 ``debug``
     Print debugging information. (default: False)
 
 ``editor``
     The editor to use during a commit. (default: ``$EDITOR`` or ``vi``)
 
 ``fallbackencoding``
     Encoding to try if it's not possible to decode the changelog using
     UTF-8. (default: ISO-8859-1)
 
 ``graphnodetemplate``
     The template used to print changeset nodes in an ASCII revision graph.
     (default: ``{graphnode}``)
 
 ``ignore``
     A file to read per-user ignore patterns from. This file should be
     in the same format as a repository-wide .hgignore file. Filenames
     are relative to the repository root. This option supports hook syntax,
     so if you want to specify multiple ignore files, you can do so by
     setting something like ``ignore.other = ~/.hgignore2``. For details
     of the ignore file format, see the ``hgignore(5)`` man page.
 
 ``interactive``
     Allow to prompt the user. (default: True)
 
 ``interface``
     Select the default interface for interactive features (default: text).
     Possible values are 'text' and 'curses'.
 
 ``interface.chunkselector``
     Select the interface for change recording (e.g. :hg:`commit -i`).
     Possible values are 'text' and 'curses'.
     This config overrides the interface specified by ui.interface.
 
 ``large-file-limit``
     Largest file size that gives no memory use warning.
     Possible values are integers or 0 to disable the check.
     (default: 10000000)
 
 ``logtemplate``
     Template string for commands that print changesets.
 
 ``merge``
     The conflict resolution program to use during a manual merge.
     For more information on merge tools see :hg:`help merge-tools`.
     For configuring merge tools see the ``[merge-tools]`` section.
 
 ``mergemarkers``
     Sets the merge conflict marker label styling. The ``detailed``
     style uses the ``mergemarkertemplate`` setting to style the labels.
     The ``basic`` style just uses 'local' and 'other' as the marker label.
     One of ``basic`` or ``detailed``.
     (default: ``basic``)
 
 ``mergemarkertemplate``
     The template used to print the commit description next to each conflict
     marker during merge conflicts. See :hg:`help templates` for the template
     format.
 
     Defaults to showing the hash, tags, branches, bookmarks, author, and
     the first line of the commit description.
 
     If you use non-ASCII characters in names for tags, branches, bookmarks,
     authors, and/or commit descriptions, you must pay attention to encodings of
     managed files. At template expansion, non-ASCII characters use the encoding
     specified by the ``--encoding`` global option, ``HGENCODING`` or other
     environment variables that govern your locale. If the encoding of the merge
     markers is different from the encoding of the merged files,
     serious problems may occur.
 
     Can be overridden per-merge-tool, see the ``[merge-tools]`` section.
 
 ``message-output``
     Where to write status and error messages. (default: ``stdio``)
 
     ``stderr``
       Everything to stderr.
     ``stdio``
       Status to stdout, and error to stderr.
 
 ``origbackuppath``
     The path to a directory used to store generated .orig files. If the path is
     not a directory, one will be created.  If set, files stored in this
     directory have the same name as the original file and do not have a .orig
     suffix.
 
 ``paginate``
   Control the pagination of command output (default: True). See :hg:`help pager`
   for details.
 
 ``patch``
     An optional external tool that ``hg import`` and some extensions
     will use for applying patches. By default Mercurial uses an
     internal patch utility. The external tool must work as the common
     Unix ``patch`` program. In particular, it must accept a ``-p``
     argument to strip patch headers, a ``-d`` argument to specify the
     current directory, a file name to patch, and a patch file to take
     from stdin.
 
     It is possible to specify a patch tool together with extra
     arguments. For example, setting this option to ``patch --merge``
     will use the ``patch`` program with its 2-way merge option.
 
 ``portablefilenames``
     Check for portable filenames. Can be ``warn``, ``ignore`` or ``abort``.
     (default: ``warn``)
 
     ``warn``
       Print a warning message on POSIX platforms, if a file with a non-portable
       filename is added (e.g. a file with a name that can't be created on
       Windows because it contains reserved parts like ``AUX``, reserved
       characters like ``:``, or would cause a case collision with an existing
       file).
 
     ``ignore``
       Don't print a warning.
 
     ``abort``
       The command is aborted.
 
     ``true``
       Alias for ``warn``.
 
     ``false``
       Alias for ``ignore``.
 
     .. container:: windows
 
       On Windows, this configuration option is ignored and the command aborted.
 
 ``pre-merge-tool-output-template``
     A template that is printed before executing an external merge tool. This can
     be used to print out additional context that might be useful to have during
     the conflict resolution, such as the description of the various commits
     involved or bookmarks/tags.
 
     Additional information is available in the ``local`, ``base``, and ``other``
     dicts. For example: ``{local.label}``, ``{base.name}``, or
     ``{other.islink}``.
 
 ``quiet``
     Reduce the amount of output printed.
     (default: False)
 
 ``remotecmd``
     Remote command to use for clone/push/pull operations.
     (default: ``hg``)
 
 ``report_untrusted``
     Warn if a ``.hg/hgrc`` file is ignored due to not being owned by a
     trusted user or group.
     (default: True)
 
 ``slash``
     (Deprecated. Use ``slashpath`` template filter instead.)
 
     Display paths using a slash (``/``) as the path separator. This
     only makes a difference on systems where the default path
     separator is not the slash character (e.g. Windows uses the
     backslash character (``\``)).
     (default: False)
 
 ``statuscopies``
     Display copies in the status command.
 
 ``ssh``
     Command to use for SSH connections. (default: ``ssh``)
 
 ``ssherrorhint``
     A hint shown to the user in the case of SSH error (e.g.
     ``Please see http://company/internalwiki/ssh.html``)
 
 ``strict``
     Require exact command names, instead of allowing unambiguous
     abbreviations. (default: False)
 
 ``style``
     Name of style to use for command output.
 
 ``supportcontact``
     A URL where users should report a Mercurial traceback. Use this if you are a
     large organisation with its own Mercurial deployment process and crash
     reports should be addressed to your internal support.
 
 ``textwidth``
     Maximum width of help text. A longer line generated by ``hg help`` or
     ``hg subcommand --help`` will be broken after white space to get this
     width or the terminal width, whichever comes first.
     A non-positive value will disable this and the terminal width will be
     used. (default: 78)
 
 ``timeout``
     The timeout used when a lock is held (in seconds), a negative value
     means no timeout. (default: 600)
 
 ``timeout.warn``
     Time (in seconds) before a warning is printed about held lock. A negative
     value means no warning. (default: 0)
 
 ``traceback``
     Mercurial always prints a traceback when an unknown exception
     occurs. Setting this to True will make Mercurial print a traceback
     on all exceptions, even those recognized by Mercurial (such as
     IOError or MemoryError). (default: False)
 
 ``tweakdefaults``
 
     By default Mercurial's behavior changes very little from release
     to release, but over time the recommended config settings
     shift. Enable this config to opt in to get automatic tweaks to
     Mercurial's behavior over time. This config setting will have no
     effect if ``HGPLAIN`` is set or ``HGPLAINEXCEPT`` is set and does
     not include ``tweakdefaults``. (default: False)
 
     It currently means::
 
       .. tweakdefaultsmarker
 
 ``username``
     The committer of a changeset created when running "commit".
     Typically a person's name and email address, e.g. ``Fred Widget
     <[e-mail]>``. Environment variables in the
     username are expanded.
 
     (default: ``$EMAIL`` or ``username@hostname``. If the username in
     hgrc is empty, e.g. if the system admin set ``username =`` in the
     system hgrc, it has to be specified manually or in a different
     hgrc file)
 
 ``verbose``
     Increase the amount of output printed. (default: False)
 
 
 ``web``
 -------
 
 Web interface configuration. The settings in this section apply to
 both the builtin webserver (started by :hg:`serve`) and the script you
 run through a webserver (``hgweb.cgi`` and the derivatives for FastCGI
 and WSGI).
 
 The Mercurial webserver does no authentication (it does not prompt for
 usernames and passwords to validate *who* users are), but it does do
 authorization (it grants or denies access for *authenticated users*
 based on settings in this section). You must either configure your
 webserver to do authentication for you, or disable the authorization
 checks.
 
 For a quick setup in a trusted environment, e.g., a private LAN, where
 you want it to accept pushes from anybody, you can use the following
 command line::
 
     $ hg --config web.allow-push=* --config web.push_ssl=False serve
 
 Note that this will allow anybody to push anything to the server and
 that this should not be used for public servers.
 
 The full set of options is:
 
 ``accesslog``
     Where to output the access log. (default: stdout)
 
 ``address``
     Interface address to bind to. (default: all)
 
 ``allow-archive``
     List of archive format (bz2, gz, zip) allowed for downloading.
     (default: empty)
 
 ``allowbz2``
     (DEPRECATED) Whether to allow .tar.bz2 downloading of repository
     revisions.
     (default: False)
 
 ``allowgz``
     (DEPRECATED) Whether to allow .tar.gz downloading of repository
     revisions.
     (default: False)
 
 ``allow-pull``
     Whether to allow pulling from the repository. (default: True)
 
 ``allow-push``
     Whether to allow pushing to the repository. If empty or not set,
     pushing is not allowed. If the special value ``*``, any remote
     user can push, including unauthenticated users. Otherwise, the
     remote user must have been authenticated, and the authenticated
     user name must be present in this list. The contents of the
     allow-push list are examined after the deny_push list.
 
 ``allow_read``
     If the user has not already been denied repository access due to
     the contents of deny_read, this list determines whether to grant
     repository access to the user. If this list is not empty, and the
     user is unauthenticated or not present in the list, then access is
     denied for the user. If the list is empty or not set, then access
     is permitted to all users by default. Setting allow_read to the
     special value ``*`` is equivalent to it not being set (i.e. access
     is permitted to all users). The contents of the allow_read list are
     examined after the deny_read list.
 
 ``allowzip``
     (DEPRECATED) Whether to allow .zip downloading of repository
     revisions. This feature creates temporary files.
     (default: False)
 
 ``archivesubrepos``
     Whether to recurse into subrepositories when archiving.
     (default: False)
 
 ``baseurl``
     Base URL to use when publishing URLs in other locations, so
     third-party tools like email notification hooks can construct
     URLs. Example: ``http://hgserver/repos/``.
 
 ``cacerts``
     Path to file containing a list of PEM encoded certificate
     authority certificates. Environment variables and ``~user``
     constructs are expanded in the filename. If specified on the
     client, then it will verify the identity of remote HTTPS servers
     with these certificates.
 
     To disable SSL verification temporarily, specify ``--insecure`` from
     command line.
 
     You can use OpenSSL's CA certificate file if your platform has
     one. On most Linux systems this will be
     ``/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt``. Otherwise you will have to
     generate this file manually. The form must be as follows::
 
         -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
         ... (certificate in base64 PEM encoding) ...
         -----END CERTIFICATE-----
         -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
         ... (certificate in base64 PEM encoding) ...
         -----END CERTIFICATE-----
 
 ``cache``
     Whether to support caching in hgweb. (default: True)
 
 ``certificate``
     Certificate to use when running :hg:`serve`.
 
 ``collapse``
     With ``descend`` enabled, repositories in subdirectories are shown at
     a single level alongside repositories in the current path. With
     ``collapse`` also enabled, repositories residing at a deeper level than
     the current path are grouped behind navigable directory entries that
     lead to the locations of these repositories. In effect, this setting
     collapses each collection of repositories found within a subdirectory
     into a single entry for that subdirectory. (default: False)
 
 ``comparisoncontext``
     Number of lines of context to show in side-by-side file comparison. If
     negative or the value ``full``, whole files are shown. (default: 5)
 
     This setting can be overridden by a ``context`` request parameter to the
     ``comparison`` command, taking the same values.
 
 ``contact``
     Name or email address of the person in charge of the repository.
     (default: ui.username or ``$EMAIL`` or "unknown" if unset or empty)
 
 ``csp``
     Send a ``Content-Security-Policy`` HTTP header with this value.
 
     The value may contain a special string ``%nonce%``, which will be replaced
     by a randomly-generated one-time use value. If the value contains
     ``%nonce%``, ``web.cache`` will be disabled, as caching undermines the
     one-time property of the nonce. This nonce will also be inserted into
     ``<script>`` elements containing inline JavaScript.
 
     Note: lots of HTML content sent by the server is derived from repository
     data. Please consider the potential for malicious repository data to
     "inject" itself into generated HTML content as part of your security
     threat model.
 
 ``deny_push``
     Whether to deny pushing to the repository. If empty or not set,
     push is not denied. If the special value ``*``, all remote users are
     denied push. Otherwise, unauthenticated users are all denied, and
     any authenticated user name present in this list is also denied. The
     contents of the deny_push list are examined before the allow-push list.
 
 ``deny_read``
     Whether to deny reading/viewing of the repository. If this list is
     not empty, unauthenticated users are all denied, and any
     authenticated user name present in this list is also denied access to
     the repository. If set to the special value ``*``, all remote users
     are denied access (rarely needed ;). If deny_read is empty or not set,
     the determination of repository access depends on the presence and
     content of the allow_read list (see description). If both
     deny_read and allow_read are empty or not set, then access is
     permitted to all users by default. If the repository is being
     served via hgwebdir, denied users will not be able to see it in
     the list of repositories. The contents of the deny_read list have
     priority over (are examined before) the contents of the allow_read
     list.
 
 ``descend``
     hgwebdir indexes will not descend into subdirectories. Only repositories
     directly in the current path will be shown (other repositories are still
     available from the index corresponding to their containing path).
 
 ``description``
     Textual description of the repository's purpose or contents.
     (default: "unknown")
 
 ``encoding``
     Character encoding name. (default: the current locale charset)
     Example: "UTF-8".
 
 ``errorlog``
     Where to output the error log. (default: stderr)
 
 ``guessmime``
     Control MIME types for raw download of file content.
     Set to True to let hgweb guess the content type from the file
     extension. This will serve HTML files as ``text/html`` and might
     allow cross-site scripting attacks when serving untrusted
     repositories. (default: False)
 
 ``hidden``
     Whether to hide the repository in the hgwebdir index.
     (default: False)
 
 ``ipv6``
     Whether to use IPv6. (default: False)
 
 ``labels``
     List of string *labels* associated with the repository.
 
     Labels are exposed as a template keyword and can be used to customize
     output. e.g. the ``index`` template can group or filter repositories
     by labels and the ``summary`` template can display additional content
     if a specific label is present.
 
 ``logoimg``
     File name of the logo image that some templates display on each page.
     The file name is relative to ``staticurl``. That is, the full path to
     the logo image is "staticurl/logoimg".
     If unset, ``hglogo.png`` will be used.
 
 ``logourl``
     Base URL to use for logos. If unset, ``https://mercurial-scm.org/``
     will be used.
 
 ``maxchanges``
     Maximum number of changes to list on the changelog. (default: 10)
 
 ``maxfiles``
     Maximum number of files to list per changeset. (default: 10)
 
 ``maxshortchanges``
     Maximum number of changes to list on the shortlog, graph or filelog
     pages. (default: 60)
 
 ``name``
     Repository name to use in the web interface.
     (default: current working directory)
 
 ``port``
     Port to listen on. (default: 8000)
 
 ``prefix``
     Prefix path to serve from. (default: '' (server root))
 
 ``push_ssl``
     Whether to require that inbound pushes be transported over SSL to
     prevent password sniffing. (default: True)
 
 ``refreshinterval``
     How frequently directory listings re-scan the filesystem for new
     repositories, in seconds. This is relevant when wildcards are used
     to define paths. Depending on how much filesystem traversal is
     required, refreshing may negatively impact performance.
 
     Values less than or equal to 0 always refresh.
     (default: 20)
 
 ``server-header``
     Value for HTTP ``Server`` response header.
 
 ``static``
     Directory where static files are served from.
 
 ``staticurl``
     Base URL to use for static files. If unset, static files (e.g. the
     hgicon.png favicon) will be served by the CGI script itself. Use
     this setting to serve them directly with the HTTP server.
     Example: ``http://hgserver/static/``.
 
 ``stripes``
     How many lines a "zebra stripe" should span in multi-line output.
     Set to 0 to disable. (default: 1)
 
 ``style``
     Which template map style to use. The available options are the names of
     subdirectories in the HTML templates path. (default: ``paper``)
     Example: ``monoblue``.
 
 ``templates``
     Where to find the HTML templates. The default path to the HTML templates
     can be obtained from ``hg debuginstall``.
 
 ``websub``
 ----------
 
 Web substitution filter definition. You can use this section to
 define a set of regular expression substitution patterns which
 let you automatically modify the hgweb server output.
 
 The default hgweb templates only apply these substitution patterns
 on the revision description fields. You can apply them anywhere
 you want when you create your own templates by adding calls to the
 "websub" filter (usually after calling the "escape" filter).
 
 This can be used, for example, to convert issue references to links
 to your issue tracker, or to convert "markdown-like" syntax into
 HTML (see the examples below).
 
 Each entry in this section names a substitution filter.
 The value of each entry defines the substitution expression itself.
 The websub expressions follow the old interhg extension syntax,
 which in turn imitates the Unix sed replacement syntax::
 
     patternname = s/SEARCH_REGEX/REPLACE_EXPRESSION/[i]
 
 You can use any separator other than "/". The final "i" is optional
 and indicates that the search must be case insensitive.
 
 Examples::
 
     [websub]
     issues = s|issue(\d+)|<a href="http://bts.example.org/issue\1">issue\1</a>|i
     italic = s/\b_(\S+)_\b/<i>\1<\/i>/
     bold = s/\*\b(\S+)\b\*/<b>\1<\/b>/
 
 ``worker``
 ----------
 
 Parallel master/worker configuration. We currently perform working
 directory updates in parallel on Unix-like systems, which greatly
 helps performance.
 
 ``enabled``
     Whether to enable workers code to be used.
     (default: true)
 
 ``numcpus``
     Number of CPUs to use for parallel operations. A zero or
     negative value is treated as ``use the default``.
     (default: 4 or the number of CPUs on the system, whichever is larger)
 
 ``backgroundclose``
     Whether to enable closing file handles on background threads during certain
     operations. Some platforms aren't very efficient at closing file
     handles that have been written or appended to. By performing file closing
     on background threads, file write rate can increase substantially.
     (default: true on Windows, false elsewhere)
 
 ``backgroundcloseminfilecount``
     Minimum number of files required to trigger background file closing.
     Operations not writing this many files won't start background close
     threads.
     (default: 2048)
 
 ``backgroundclosemaxqueue``
     The maximum number of opened file handles waiting to be closed in the
     background. This option only has an effect if ``backgroundclose`` is
     enabled.
     (default: 384)
 
 ``backgroundclosethreadcount``
     Number of threads to process background file closes. Only relevant if
     ``backgroundclose`` is enabled.
     (default: 4)

mercurial/localrepo.py

@@ -1,3090 +1,3089 b''
 # localrepo.py - read/write repository class for mercurial
 #
 # Copyright 2005-2007 Matt Mackall <[e-mail]>
 #
 # This software may be used and distributed according to the terms of the
 # GNU General Public License version 2 or any later version.
 
 from __future__ import absolute_import
 
 import errno
 import hashlib
 import os
 import random
 import sys
 import time
 import weakref
 
 from .i18n import _
 from .node import (
     bin,
     hex,
     nullid,
     nullrev,
     short,
 )
 from . import (
     bookmarks,
     branchmap,
     bundle2,
     changegroup,
     changelog,
     color,
     context,
     dirstate,
     dirstateguard,
     discovery,
     encoding,
     error,
     exchange,
     extensions,
     filelog,
     hook,
     lock as lockmod,
     manifest,
     match as matchmod,
     merge as mergemod,
     mergeutil,
     namespaces,
     narrowspec,
     obsolete,
     pathutil,
     phases,
     pushkey,
     pycompat,
     repository,
     repoview,
     revset,
     revsetlang,
     scmutil,
     sparse,
     store as storemod,
     subrepoutil,
     tags as tagsmod,
     transaction,
     txnutil,
     util,
     vfs as vfsmod,
 )
 from .utils import (
     interfaceutil,
     procutil,
     stringutil,
 )
 
 from .revlogutils import (
     constants as revlogconst,
 )
 
 release = lockmod.release
 urlerr = util.urlerr
 urlreq = util.urlreq
 
 # set of (path, vfs-location) tuples. vfs-location is:
 # - 'plain for vfs relative paths
 # - '' for svfs relative paths
 _cachedfiles = set()
 
 class _basefilecache(scmutil.filecache):
     """All filecache usage on repo are done for logic that should be unfiltered
     """
     def __get__(self, repo, type=None):
         if repo is None:
             return self
         # proxy to unfiltered __dict__ since filtered repo has no entry
         unfi = repo.unfiltered()
         try:
             return unfi.__dict__[self.sname]
         except KeyError:
             pass
         return super(_basefilecache, self).__get__(unfi, type)
 
     def set(self, repo, value):
         return super(_basefilecache, self).set(repo.unfiltered(), value)
 
 class repofilecache(_basefilecache):
     """filecache for files in .hg but outside of .hg/store"""
     def __init__(self, *paths):
         super(repofilecache, self).__init__(*paths)
         for path in paths:
             _cachedfiles.add((path, 'plain'))
 
     def join(self, obj, fname):
         return obj.vfs.join(fname)
 
 class storecache(_basefilecache):
     """filecache for files in the store"""
     def __init__(self, *paths):
         super(storecache, self).__init__(*paths)
         for path in paths:
             _cachedfiles.add((path, ''))
 
     def join(self, obj, fname):
         return obj.sjoin(fname)
 
 def isfilecached(repo, name):
     """check if a repo has already cached "name" filecache-ed property
 
     This returns (cachedobj-or-None, iscached) tuple.
     """
     cacheentry = repo.unfiltered()._filecache.get(name, None)
     if not cacheentry:
         return None, False
     return cacheentry.obj, True
 
 class unfilteredpropertycache(util.propertycache):
     """propertycache that apply to unfiltered repo only"""
 
     def __get__(self, repo, type=None):
         unfi = repo.unfiltered()
         if unfi is repo:
             return super(unfilteredpropertycache, self).__get__(unfi)
         return getattr(unfi, self.name)
 
 class filteredpropertycache(util.propertycache):
     """propertycache that must take filtering in account"""
 
     def cachevalue(self, obj, value):
         object.__setattr__(obj, self.name, value)
 
 
 def hasunfilteredcache(repo, name):
     """check if a repo has an unfilteredpropertycache value for <name>"""
     return name in vars(repo.unfiltered())
 
 def unfilteredmethod(orig):
     """decorate method that always need to be run on unfiltered version"""
     def wrapper(repo, *args, **kwargs):
         return orig(repo.unfiltered(), *args, **kwargs)
     return wrapper
 
 moderncaps = {'lookup', 'branchmap', 'pushkey', 'known', 'getbundle',
               'unbundle'}
 legacycaps = moderncaps.union({'changegroupsubset'})
 
 @interfaceutil.implementer(repository.ipeercommandexecutor)
 class localcommandexecutor(object):
     def __init__(self, peer):
         self._peer = peer
         self._sent = False
         self._closed = False
 
     def __enter__(self):
         return self
 
     def __exit__(self, exctype, excvalue, exctb):
         self.close()
 
     def callcommand(self, command, args):
         if self._sent:
             raise error.ProgrammingError('callcommand() cannot be used after '
                                          'sendcommands()')
 
         if self._closed:
             raise error.ProgrammingError('callcommand() cannot be used after '
                                          'close()')
 
         # We don't need to support anything fancy. Just call the named
         # method on the peer and return a resolved future.
         fn = getattr(self._peer, pycompat.sysstr(command))
 
         f = pycompat.futures.Future()
 
         try:
             result = fn(**pycompat.strkwargs(args))
         except Exception:
             pycompat.future_set_exception_info(f, sys.exc_info()[1:])
         else:
             f.set_result(result)
 
         return f
 
     def sendcommands(self):
         self._sent = True
 
     def close(self):
         self._closed = True
 
 @interfaceutil.implementer(repository.ipeercommands)
 class localpeer(repository.peer):
     '''peer for a local repo; reflects only the most recent API'''
 
     def __init__(self, repo, caps=None):
         super(localpeer, self).__init__()
 
         if caps is None:
             caps = moderncaps.copy()
         self._repo = repo.filtered('served')
         self.ui = repo.ui
         self._caps = repo._restrictcapabilities(caps)
 
     # Begin of _basepeer interface.
 
     def url(self):
         return self._repo.url()
 
     def local(self):
         return self._repo
 
     def peer(self):
         return self
 
     def canpush(self):
         return True
 
     def close(self):
         self._repo.close()
 
     # End of _basepeer interface.
 
     # Begin of _basewirecommands interface.
 
     def branchmap(self):
         return self._repo.branchmap()
 
     def capabilities(self):
         return self._caps
 
     def clonebundles(self):
         return self._repo.tryread('clonebundles.manifest')
 
     def debugwireargs(self, one, two, three=None, four=None, five=None):
         """Used to test argument passing over the wire"""
         return "%s %s %s %s %s" % (one, two, pycompat.bytestr(three),
                                    pycompat.bytestr(four),
                                    pycompat.bytestr(five))
 
     def getbundle(self, source, heads=None, common=None, bundlecaps=None,
                   **kwargs):
         chunks = exchange.getbundlechunks(self._repo, source, heads=heads,
                                           common=common, bundlecaps=bundlecaps,
                                           **kwargs)[1]
         cb = util.chunkbuffer(chunks)
 
         if exchange.bundle2requested(bundlecaps):
             # When requesting a bundle2, getbundle returns a stream to make the
             # wire level function happier. We need to build a proper object
             # from it in local peer.
             return bundle2.getunbundler(self.ui, cb)
         else:
             return changegroup.getunbundler('01', cb, None)
 
     def heads(self):
         return self._repo.heads()
 
     def known(self, nodes):
         return self._repo.known(nodes)
 
     def listkeys(self, namespace):
         return self._repo.listkeys(namespace)
 
     def lookup(self, key):
         return self._repo.lookup(key)
 
     def pushkey(self, namespace, key, old, new):
         return self._repo.pushkey(namespace, key, old, new)
 
     def stream_out(self):
         raise error.Abort(_('cannot perform stream clone against local '
                             'peer'))
 
     def unbundle(self, bundle, heads, url):
         """apply a bundle on a repo
 
         This function handles the repo locking itself."""
         try:
             try:
                 bundle = exchange.readbundle(self.ui, bundle, None)
                 ret = exchange.unbundle(self._repo, bundle, heads, 'push', url)
                 if util.safehasattr(ret, 'getchunks'):
                     # This is a bundle20 object, turn it into an unbundler.
                     # This little dance should be dropped eventually when the
                     # API is finally improved.
                     stream = util.chunkbuffer(ret.getchunks())
                     ret = bundle2.getunbundler(self.ui, stream)
                 return ret
             except Exception as exc:
                 # If the exception contains output salvaged from a bundle2
                 # reply, we need to make sure it is printed before continuing
                 # to fail. So we build a bundle2 with such output and consume
                 # it directly.
                 #
                 # This is not very elegant but allows a "simple" solution for
                 # issue4594
                 output = getattr(exc, '_bundle2salvagedoutput', ())
                 if output:
                     bundler = bundle2.bundle20(self._repo.ui)
                     for out in output:
                         bundler.addpart(out)
                     stream = util.chunkbuffer(bundler.getchunks())
                     b = bundle2.getunbundler(self.ui, stream)
                     bundle2.processbundle(self._repo, b)
                 raise
         except error.PushRaced as exc:
             raise error.ResponseError(_('push failed:'),
                                       stringutil.forcebytestr(exc))
 
     # End of _basewirecommands interface.
 
     # Begin of peer interface.
 
     def commandexecutor(self):
         return localcommandexecutor(self)
 
     # End of peer interface.
 
 @interfaceutil.implementer(repository.ipeerlegacycommands)
 class locallegacypeer(localpeer):
     '''peer extension which implements legacy methods too; used for tests with
     restricted capabilities'''
 
     def __init__(self, repo):
         super(locallegacypeer, self).__init__(repo, caps=legacycaps)
 
     # Begin of baselegacywirecommands interface.
 
     def between(self, pairs):
         return self._repo.between(pairs)
 
     def branches(self, nodes):
         return self._repo.branches(nodes)
 
     def changegroup(self, nodes, source):
         outgoing = discovery.outgoing(self._repo, missingroots=nodes,
                                       missingheads=self._repo.heads())
         return changegroup.makechangegroup(self._repo, outgoing, '01', source)
 
     def changegroupsubset(self, bases, heads, source):
         outgoing = discovery.outgoing(self._repo, missingroots=bases,
                                       missingheads=heads)
         return changegroup.makechangegroup(self._repo, outgoing, '01', source)
 
     # End of baselegacywirecommands interface.
 
 # Increment the sub-version when the revlog v2 format changes to lock out old
 # clients.
 REVLOGV2_REQUIREMENT = 'exp-revlogv2.1'
 
 # A repository with the sparserevlog feature will have delta chains that
 # can spread over a larger span. Sparse reading cuts these large spans into
 # pieces, so that each piece isn't too big.
 # Without the sparserevlog capability, reading from the repository could use
 # huge amounts of memory, because the whole span would be read at once,
 # including all the intermediate revisions that aren't pertinent for the chain.
 # This is why once a repository has enabled sparse-read, it becomes required.
 SPARSEREVLOG_REQUIREMENT = 'sparserevlog'
 
 # Functions receiving (ui, features) that extensions can register to impact
 # the ability to load repositories with custom requirements. Only
 # functions defined in loaded extensions are called.
 #
 # The function receives a set of requirement strings that the repository
 # is capable of opening. Functions will typically add elements to the
 # set to reflect that the extension knows how to handle that requirements.
 featuresetupfuncs = set()
 
 def makelocalrepository(baseui, path, intents=None):
     """Create a local repository object.
 
     Given arguments needed to construct a local repository, this function
     performs various early repository loading functionality (such as
     reading the ``.hg/requires`` and ``.hg/hgrc`` files), validates that
     the repository can be opened, derives a type suitable for representing
     that repository, and returns an instance of it.
 
     The returned object conforms to the ``repository.completelocalrepository``
     interface.
 
     The repository type is derived by calling a series of factory functions
     for each aspect/interface of the final repository. These are defined by
     ``REPO_INTERFACES``.
 
     Each factory function is called to produce a type implementing a specific
     interface. The cumulative list of returned types will be combined into a
     new type and that type will be instantiated to represent the local
     repository.
 
     The factory functions each receive various state that may be consulted
     as part of deriving a type.
 
     Extensions should wrap these factory functions to customize repository type
     creation. Note that an extension's wrapped function may be called even if
     that extension is not loaded for the repo being constructed. Extensions
     should check if their ``__name__`` appears in the
     ``extensionmodulenames`` set passed to the factory function and no-op if
     not.
     """
     ui = baseui.copy()
     # Prevent copying repo configuration.
     ui.copy = baseui.copy
 
     # Working directory VFS rooted at repository root.
     wdirvfs = vfsmod.vfs(path, expandpath=True, realpath=True)
 
     # Main VFS for .hg/ directory.
     hgpath = wdirvfs.join(b'.hg')
     hgvfs = vfsmod.vfs(hgpath, cacheaudited=True)
 
     # The .hg/ path should exist and should be a directory. All other
     # cases are errors.
     if not hgvfs.isdir():
         try:
             hgvfs.stat()
         except OSError as e:
             if e.errno != errno.ENOENT:
                 raise
 
         raise error.RepoError(_(b'repository %s not found') % path)
 
     # .hg/requires file contains a newline-delimited list of
     # features/capabilities the opener (us) must have in order to use
     # the repository. This file was introduced in Mercurial 0.9.2,
     # which means very old repositories may not have one. We assume
     # a missing file translates to no requirements.
     try:
         requirements = set(hgvfs.read(b'requires').splitlines())
     except IOError as e:
         if e.errno != errno.ENOENT:
             raise
         requirements = set()
 
     # The .hg/hgrc file may load extensions or contain config options
     # that influence repository construction. Attempt to load it and
     # process any new extensions that it may have pulled in.
     if loadhgrc(ui, wdirvfs, hgvfs, requirements):
         afterhgrcload(ui, wdirvfs, hgvfs, requirements)
         extensions.loadall(ui)
         extensions.populateui(ui)
 
     # Set of module names of extensions loaded for this repository.
     extensionmodulenames = {m.__name__ for n, m in extensions.extensions(ui)}
 
     supportedrequirements = gathersupportedrequirements(ui)
 
     # We first validate the requirements are known.
     ensurerequirementsrecognized(requirements, supportedrequirements)
 
     # Then we validate that the known set is reasonable to use together.
     ensurerequirementscompatible(ui, requirements)
 
     # TODO there are unhandled edge cases related to opening repositories with
     # shared storage. If storage is shared, we should also test for requirements
     # compatibility in the pointed-to repo. This entails loading the .hg/hgrc in
     # that repo, as that repo may load extensions needed to open it. This is a
     # bit complicated because we don't want the other hgrc to overwrite settings
     # in this hgrc.
     #
     # This bug is somewhat mitigated by the fact that we copy the .hg/requires
     # file when sharing repos. But if a requirement is added after the share is
     # performed, thereby introducing a new requirement for the opener, we may
     # will not see that and could encounter a run-time error interacting with
     # that shared store since it has an unknown-to-us requirement.
 
     # At this point, we know we should be capable of opening the repository.
     # Now get on with doing that.
 
     features = set()
 
     # The "store" part of the repository holds versioned data. How it is
     # accessed is determined by various requirements. The ``shared`` or
     # ``relshared`` requirements indicate the store lives in the path contained
     # in the ``.hg/sharedpath`` file. This is an absolute path for
     # ``shared`` and relative to ``.hg/`` for ``relshared``.
     if b'shared' in requirements or b'relshared' in requirements:
         sharedpath = hgvfs.read(b'sharedpath').rstrip(b'\n')
         if b'relshared' in requirements:
             sharedpath = hgvfs.join(sharedpath)
 
         sharedvfs = vfsmod.vfs(sharedpath, realpath=True)
 
         if not sharedvfs.exists():
             raise error.RepoError(_(b'.hg/sharedpath points to nonexistent '
                                     b'directory %s') % sharedvfs.base)
 
         features.add(repository.REPO_FEATURE_SHARED_STORAGE)
 
         storebasepath = sharedvfs.base
         cachepath = sharedvfs.join(b'cache')
     else:
         storebasepath = hgvfs.base
         cachepath = hgvfs.join(b'cache')
     wcachepath = hgvfs.join(b'wcache')
 
 
     # The store has changed over time and the exact layout is dictated by
     # requirements. The store interface abstracts differences across all
     # of them.
     store = makestore(requirements, storebasepath,
                       lambda base: vfsmod.vfs(base, cacheaudited=True))
     hgvfs.createmode = store.createmode
 
     storevfs = store.vfs
     storevfs.options = resolvestorevfsoptions(ui, requirements, features)
 
     # The cache vfs is used to manage cache files.
     cachevfs = vfsmod.vfs(cachepath, cacheaudited=True)
     cachevfs.createmode = store.createmode
     # The cache vfs is used to manage cache files related to the working copy
     wcachevfs = vfsmod.vfs(wcachepath, cacheaudited=True)
     wcachevfs.createmode = store.createmode
 
     # Now resolve the type for the repository object. We do this by repeatedly
     # calling a factory function to produces types for specific aspects of the
     # repo's operation. The aggregate returned types are used as base classes
     # for a dynamically-derived type, which will represent our new repository.
 
     bases = []
     extrastate = {}
 
     for iface, fn in REPO_INTERFACES:
         # We pass all potentially useful state to give extensions tons of
         # flexibility.
         typ = fn()(ui=ui,
                  intents=intents,
                  requirements=requirements,
                  features=features,
                  wdirvfs=wdirvfs,
                  hgvfs=hgvfs,
                  store=store,
                  storevfs=storevfs,
                  storeoptions=storevfs.options,
                  cachevfs=cachevfs,
                  wcachevfs=wcachevfs,
                  extensionmodulenames=extensionmodulenames,
                  extrastate=extrastate,
                  baseclasses=bases)
 
         if not isinstance(typ, type):
             raise error.ProgrammingError('unable to construct type for %s' %
                                          iface)
 
         bases.append(typ)
 
     # type() allows you to use characters in type names that wouldn't be
     # recognized as Python symbols in source code. We abuse that to add
     # rich information about our constructed repo.
     name = pycompat.sysstr(b'derivedrepo:%s<%s>' % (
         wdirvfs.base,
         b','.join(sorted(requirements))))
 
     cls = type(name, tuple(bases), {})
 
     return cls(
         baseui=baseui,
         ui=ui,
         origroot=path,
         wdirvfs=wdirvfs,
         hgvfs=hgvfs,
         requirements=requirements,
         supportedrequirements=supportedrequirements,
         sharedpath=storebasepath,
         store=store,
         cachevfs=cachevfs,
         wcachevfs=wcachevfs,
         features=features,
         intents=intents)
 
 def loadhgrc(ui, wdirvfs, hgvfs, requirements):
     """Load hgrc files/content into a ui instance.
 
     This is called during repository opening to load any additional
     config files or settings relevant to the current repository.
 
     Returns a bool indicating whether any additional configs were loaded.
 
     Extensions should monkeypatch this function to modify how per-repo
     configs are loaded. For example, an extension may wish to pull in
     configs from alternate files or sources.
     """
     try:
         ui.readconfig(hgvfs.join(b'hgrc'), root=wdirvfs.base)
         return True
     except IOError:
         return False
 
 def afterhgrcload(ui, wdirvfs, hgvfs, requirements):
     """Perform additional actions after .hg/hgrc is loaded.
 
     This function is called during repository loading immediately after
     the .hg/hgrc file is loaded and before per-repo extensions are loaded.
 
     The function can be used to validate configs, automatically add
     options (including extensions) based on requirements, etc.
     """
 
     # Map of requirements to list of extensions to load automatically when
     # requirement is present.
     autoextensions = {
         b'largefiles': [b'largefiles'],
         b'lfs': [b'lfs'],
     }
 
     for requirement, names in sorted(autoextensions.items()):
         if requirement not in requirements:
             continue
 
         for name in names:
             if not ui.hasconfig(b'extensions', name):
                 ui.setconfig(b'extensions', name, b'', source='autoload')
 
 def gathersupportedrequirements(ui):
     """Determine the complete set of recognized requirements."""
     # Start with all requirements supported by this file.
     supported = set(localrepository._basesupported)
 
     # Execute ``featuresetupfuncs`` entries if they belong to an extension
     # relevant to this ui instance.
     modules = {m.__name__ for n, m in extensions.extensions(ui)}
 
     for fn in featuresetupfuncs:
         if fn.__module__ in modules:
             fn(ui, supported)
 
     # Add derived requirements from registered compression engines.
     for name in util.compengines:
         engine = util.compengines[name]
         if engine.revlogheader():
             supported.add(b'exp-compression-%s' % name)
 
     return supported
 
 def ensurerequirementsrecognized(requirements, supported):
     """Validate that a set of local requirements is recognized.
 
     Receives a set of requirements. Raises an ``error.RepoError`` if there
     exists any requirement in that set that currently loaded code doesn't
     recognize.
 
     Returns a set of supported requirements.
     """
     missing = set()
 
     for requirement in requirements:
         if requirement in supported:
             continue
 
         if not requirement or not requirement[0:1].isalnum():
             raise error.RequirementError(_(b'.hg/requires file is corrupt'))
 
         missing.add(requirement)
 
     if missing:
         raise error.RequirementError(
             _(b'repository requires features unknown to this Mercurial: %s') %
             b' '.join(sorted(missing)),
             hint=_(b'see https://mercurial-scm.org/wiki/MissingRequirement '
                    b'for more information'))
 
 def ensurerequirementscompatible(ui, requirements):
     """Validates that a set of recognized requirements is mutually compatible.
 
     Some requirements may not be compatible with others or require
     config options that aren't enabled. This function is called during
     repository opening to ensure that the set of requirements needed
     to open a repository is sane and compatible with config options.
 
     Extensions can monkeypatch this function to perform additional
     checking.
 
     ``error.RepoError`` should be raised on failure.
     """
     if b'exp-sparse' in requirements and not sparse.enabled:
         raise error.RepoError(_(b'repository is using sparse feature but '
                                 b'sparse is not enabled; enable the '
                                 b'"sparse" extensions to access'))
 
 def makestore(requirements, path, vfstype):
     """Construct a storage object for a repository."""
     if b'store' in requirements:
         if b'fncache' in requirements:
             return storemod.fncachestore(path, vfstype,
                                          b'dotencode' in requirements)
 
         return storemod.encodedstore(path, vfstype)
 
     return storemod.basicstore(path, vfstype)
 
 def resolvestorevfsoptions(ui, requirements, features):
     """Resolve the options to pass to the store vfs opener.
 
     The returned dict is used to influence behavior of the storage layer.
     """
     options = {}
 
     if b'treemanifest' in requirements:
         options[b'treemanifest'] = True
 
     # experimental config: format.manifestcachesize
     manifestcachesize = ui.configint(b'format', b'manifestcachesize')
     if manifestcachesize is not None:
         options[b'manifestcachesize'] = manifestcachesize
 
     # In the absence of another requirement superseding a revlog-related
     # requirement, we have to assume the repo is using revlog version 0.
     # This revlog format is super old and we don't bother trying to parse
     # opener options for it because those options wouldn't do anything
     # meaningful on such old repos.
     if b'revlogv1' in requirements or REVLOGV2_REQUIREMENT in requirements:
         options.update(resolverevlogstorevfsoptions(ui, requirements, features))
 
     return options
 
 def resolverevlogstorevfsoptions(ui, requirements, features):
     """Resolve opener options specific to revlogs."""
 
     options = {}
     options[b'flagprocessors'] = {}
 
     if b'revlogv1' in requirements:
         options[b'revlogv1'] = True
     if REVLOGV2_REQUIREMENT in requirements:
         options[b'revlogv2'] = True
 
     if b'generaldelta' in requirements:
         options[b'generaldelta'] = True
 
     # experimental config: format.chunkcachesize
     chunkcachesize = ui.configint(b'format', b'chunkcachesize')
     if chunkcachesize is not None:
         options[b'chunkcachesize'] = chunkcachesize
 
     deltabothparents = ui.configbool(b'storage',
                                      b'revlog.optimize-delta-parent-choice')
     options[b'deltabothparents'] = deltabothparents
 
     options[b'lazydeltabase'] = not scmutil.gddeltaconfig(ui)
 
     chainspan = ui.configbytes(b'experimental', b'maxdeltachainspan')
     if 0 <= chainspan:
         options[b'maxdeltachainspan'] = chainspan
 
     mmapindexthreshold = ui.configbytes(b'experimental',
                                         b'mmapindexthreshold')
     if mmapindexthreshold is not None:
         options[b'mmapindexthreshold'] = mmapindexthreshold
 
     withsparseread = ui.configbool(b'experimental', b'sparse-read')
     srdensitythres = float(ui.config(b'experimental',
                                      b'sparse-read.density-threshold'))
     srmingapsize = ui.configbytes(b'experimental',
                                   b'sparse-read.min-gap-size')
     options[b'with-sparse-read'] = withsparseread
     options[b'sparse-read-density-threshold'] = srdensitythres
     options[b'sparse-read-min-gap-size'] = srmingapsize
 
     sparserevlog = SPARSEREVLOG_REQUIREMENT in requirements
     options[b'sparse-revlog'] = sparserevlog
     if sparserevlog:
         options[b'generaldelta'] = True
 
     maxchainlen = None
     if sparserevlog:
         maxchainlen = revlogconst.SPARSE_REVLOG_MAX_CHAIN_LENGTH
     # experimental config: format.maxchainlen
     maxchainlen = ui.configint(b'format', b'maxchainlen', maxchainlen)
     if maxchainlen is not None:
         options[b'maxchainlen'] = maxchainlen
 
     for r in requirements:
         if r.startswith(b'exp-compression-'):
             options[b'compengine'] = r[len(b'exp-compression-'):]
 
     if repository.NARROW_REQUIREMENT in requirements:
         options[b'enableellipsis'] = True
 
     return options
 
 def makemain(**kwargs):
     """Produce a type conforming to ``ilocalrepositorymain``."""
     return localrepository
 
 @interfaceutil.implementer(repository.ilocalrepositoryfilestorage)
 class revlogfilestorage(object):
     """File storage when using revlogs."""
 
     def file(self, path):
         if path[0] == b'/':
             path = path[1:]
 
         return filelog.filelog(self.svfs, path)
 
 @interfaceutil.implementer(repository.ilocalrepositoryfilestorage)
 class revlognarrowfilestorage(object):
     """File storage when using revlogs and narrow files."""
 
     def file(self, path):
         if path[0] == b'/':
             path = path[1:]
 
         return filelog.narrowfilelog(self.svfs, path, self._storenarrowmatch)
 
 def makefilestorage(requirements, features, **kwargs):
     """Produce a type conforming to ``ilocalrepositoryfilestorage``."""
     features.add(repository.REPO_FEATURE_REVLOG_FILE_STORAGE)
     features.add(repository.REPO_FEATURE_STREAM_CLONE)
 
     if repository.NARROW_REQUIREMENT in requirements:
         return revlognarrowfilestorage
     else:
         return revlogfilestorage
 
 # List of repository interfaces and factory functions for them. Each
 # will be called in order during ``makelocalrepository()`` to iteratively
 # derive the final type for a local repository instance. We capture the
 # function as a lambda so we don't hold a reference and the module-level
 # functions can be wrapped.
 REPO_INTERFACES = [
     (repository.ilocalrepositorymain, lambda: makemain),
     (repository.ilocalrepositoryfilestorage, lambda: makefilestorage),
 ]
 
 @interfaceutil.implementer(repository.ilocalrepositorymain)
 class localrepository(object):
     """Main class for representing local repositories.
 
     All local repositories are instances of this class.
 
     Constructed on its own, instances of this class are not usable as
     repository objects. To obtain a usable repository object, call
     ``hg.repository()``, ``localrepo.instance()``, or
     ``localrepo.makelocalrepository()``. The latter is the lowest-level.
     ``instance()`` adds support for creating new repositories.
     ``hg.repository()`` adds more extension integration, including calling
     ``reposetup()``. Generally speaking, ``hg.repository()`` should be
     used.
     """
 
     # obsolete experimental requirements:
     #  - manifestv2: An experimental new manifest format that allowed
     #    for stem compression of long paths. Experiment ended up not
     #    being successful (repository sizes went up due to worse delta
     #    chains), and the code was deleted in 4.6.
     supportedformats = {
         'revlogv1',
         'generaldelta',
         'treemanifest',
         REVLOGV2_REQUIREMENT,
         SPARSEREVLOG_REQUIREMENT,
     }
     _basesupported = supportedformats | {
         'store',
         'fncache',
         'shared',
         'relshared',
         'dotencode',
         'exp-sparse',
         'internal-phase'
     }
 
     # list of prefix for file which can be written without 'wlock'
     # Extensions should extend this list when needed
     _wlockfreeprefix = {
         # We migh consider requiring 'wlock' for the next
         # two, but pretty much all the existing code assume
         # wlock is not needed so we keep them excluded for
         # now.
         'hgrc',
         'requires',
         # XXX cache is a complicatged business someone
         # should investigate this in depth at some point
         'cache/',
         # XXX shouldn't be dirstate covered by the wlock?
         'dirstate',
         # XXX bisect was still a bit too messy at the time
         # this changeset was introduced. Someone should fix
         # the remainig bit and drop this line
         'bisect.state',
     }
 
     def __init__(self, baseui, ui, origroot, wdirvfs, hgvfs, requirements,
                  supportedrequirements, sharedpath, store, cachevfs, wcachevfs,
                  features, intents=None):
         """Create a new local repository instance.
 
         Most callers should use ``hg.repository()``, ``localrepo.instance()``,
         or ``localrepo.makelocalrepository()`` for obtaining a new repository
         object.
 
         Arguments:
 
         baseui
            ``ui.ui`` instance that ``ui`` argument was based off of.
 
         ui
            ``ui.ui`` instance for use by the repository.
 
         origroot
            ``bytes`` path to working directory root of this repository.
 
         wdirvfs
            ``vfs.vfs`` rooted at the working directory.
 
         hgvfs
            ``vfs.vfs`` rooted at .hg/
 
         requirements
            ``set`` of bytestrings representing repository opening requirements.
 
         supportedrequirements
            ``set`` of bytestrings representing repository requirements that we
            know how to open. May be a supetset of ``requirements``.
 
         sharedpath
            ``bytes`` Defining path to storage base directory. Points to a
            ``.hg/`` directory somewhere.
 
         store
            ``store.basicstore`` (or derived) instance providing access to
            versioned storage.
 
         cachevfs
            ``vfs.vfs`` used for cache files.
 
         wcachevfs
            ``vfs.vfs`` used for cache files related to the working copy.
 
         features
            ``set`` of bytestrings defining features/capabilities of this
            instance.
 
         intents
            ``set`` of system strings indicating what this repo will be used
            for.
         """
         self.baseui = baseui
         self.ui = ui
         self.origroot = origroot
         # vfs rooted at working directory.
         self.wvfs = wdirvfs
         self.root = wdirvfs.base
         # vfs rooted at .hg/. Used to access most non-store paths.
         self.vfs = hgvfs
         self.path = hgvfs.base
         self.requirements = requirements
         self.supported = supportedrequirements
         self.sharedpath = sharedpath
         self.store = store
         self.cachevfs = cachevfs
         self.wcachevfs = wcachevfs
         self.features = features
 
         self.filtername = None
 
         if (self.ui.configbool('devel', 'all-warnings') or
             self.ui.configbool('devel', 'check-locks')):
             self.vfs.audit = self._getvfsward(self.vfs.audit)
         # A list of callback to shape the phase if no data were found.
         # Callback are in the form: func(repo, roots) --> processed root.
         # This list it to be filled by extension during repo setup
         self._phasedefaults = []
 
         color.setup(self.ui)
 
         self.spath = self.store.path
         self.svfs = self.store.vfs
         self.sjoin = self.store.join
         if (self.ui.configbool('devel', 'all-warnings') or
             self.ui.configbool('devel', 'check-locks')):
             if util.safehasattr(self.svfs, 'vfs'): # this is filtervfs
                 self.svfs.vfs.audit = self._getsvfsward(self.svfs.vfs.audit)
             else: # standard vfs
                 self.svfs.audit = self._getsvfsward(self.svfs.audit)
 
         self._dirstatevalidatewarned = False
 
         self._branchcaches = {}
         self._revbranchcache = None
         self._filterpats = {}
         self._datafilters = {}
         self._transref = self._lockref = self._wlockref = None
 
         # A cache for various files under .hg/ that tracks file changes,
         # (used by the filecache decorator)
         #
         # Maps a property name to its util.filecacheentry
         self._filecache = {}
 
         # hold sets of revision to be filtered
         # should be cleared when something might have changed the filter value:
         # - new changesets,
         # - phase change,
         # - new obsolescence marker,
         # - working directory parent change,
         # - bookmark changes
         self.filteredrevcache = {}
 
         # post-dirstate-status hooks
         self._postdsstatus = []
 
         # generic mapping between names and nodes
         self.names = namespaces.namespaces()
 
         # Key to signature value.
         self._sparsesignaturecache = {}
         # Signature to cached matcher instance.
         self._sparsematchercache = {}
 
     def _getvfsward(self, origfunc):
         """build a ward for self.vfs"""
         rref = weakref.ref(self)
         def checkvfs(path, mode=None):
             ret = origfunc(path, mode=mode)
             repo = rref()
             if (repo is None
                 or not util.safehasattr(repo, '_wlockref')
                 or not util.safehasattr(repo, '_lockref')):
                 return
             if mode in (None, 'r', 'rb'):
                 return
             if path.startswith(repo.path):
                 # truncate name relative to the repository (.hg)
                 path = path[len(repo.path) + 1:]
             if path.startswith('cache/'):
                 msg = 'accessing cache with vfs instead of cachevfs: "%s"'
                 repo.ui.develwarn(msg % path, stacklevel=3, config="cache-vfs")
             if path.startswith('journal.') or path.startswith('undo.'):
                 # journal is covered by 'lock'
                 if repo._currentlock(repo._lockref) is None:
                     repo.ui.develwarn('write with no lock: "%s"' % path,
                                       stacklevel=3, config='check-locks')
             elif repo._currentlock(repo._wlockref) is None:
                 # rest of vfs files are covered by 'wlock'
                 #
                 # exclude special files
                 for prefix in self._wlockfreeprefix:
                     if path.startswith(prefix):
                         return
                 repo.ui.develwarn('write with no wlock: "%s"' % path,
                                   stacklevel=3, config='check-locks')
             return ret
         return checkvfs
 
     def _getsvfsward(self, origfunc):
         """build a ward for self.svfs"""
         rref = weakref.ref(self)
         def checksvfs(path, mode=None):
             ret = origfunc(path, mode=mode)
             repo = rref()
             if repo is None or not util.safehasattr(repo, '_lockref'):
                 return
             if mode in (None, 'r', 'rb'):
                 return
             if path.startswith(repo.sharedpath):
                 # truncate name relative to the repository (.hg)
                 path = path[len(repo.sharedpath) + 1:]
             if repo._currentlock(repo._lockref) is None:
                 repo.ui.develwarn('write with no lock: "%s"' % path,
                                   stacklevel=4)
             return ret
         return checksvfs
 
     def close(self):
         self._writecaches()
 
     def _writecaches(self):
         if self._revbranchcache:
             self._revbranchcache.write()
 
     def _restrictcapabilities(self, caps):
         if self.ui.configbool('experimental', 'bundle2-advertise'):
             caps = set(caps)
             capsblob = bundle2.encodecaps(bundle2.getrepocaps(self,
                                                               role='client'))
             caps.add('bundle2=' + urlreq.quote(capsblob))
         return caps
 
     def _writerequirements(self):
         scmutil.writerequires(self.vfs, self.requirements)
 
     # Don't cache auditor/nofsauditor, or you'll end up with reference cycle:
     # self -> auditor -> self._checknested -> self
 
     @property
     def auditor(self):
         # This is only used by context.workingctx.match in order to
         # detect files in subrepos.
         return pathutil.pathauditor(self.root, callback=self._checknested)
 
     @property
     def nofsauditor(self):
         # This is only used by context.basectx.match in order to detect
         # files in subrepos.
         return pathutil.pathauditor(self.root, callback=self._checknested,
                                     realfs=False, cached=True)
 
     def _checknested(self, path):
         """Determine if path is a legal nested repository."""
         if not path.startswith(self.root):
             return False
         subpath = path[len(self.root) + 1:]
         normsubpath = util.pconvert(subpath)
 
         # XXX: Checking against the current working copy is wrong in
         # the sense that it can reject things like
         #
         #   $ hg cat -r 10 sub/x.txt
         #
         # if sub/ is no longer a subrepository in the working copy
         # parent revision.
         #
         # However, it can of course also allow things that would have
         # been rejected before, such as the above cat command if sub/
         # is a subrepository now, but was a normal directory before.
         # The old path auditor would have rejected by mistake since it
         # panics when it sees sub/.hg/.
         #
         # All in all, checking against the working copy seems sensible
         # since we want to prevent access to nested repositories on
         # the filesystem *now*.
         ctx = self[None]
         parts = util.splitpath(subpath)
         while parts:
             prefix = '/'.join(parts)
             if prefix in ctx.substate:
                 if prefix == normsubpath:
                     return True
                 else:
                     sub = ctx.sub(prefix)
                     return sub.checknested(subpath[len(prefix) + 1:])
             else:
                 parts.pop()
         return False
 
     def peer(self):
         return localpeer(self) # not cached to avoid reference cycle
 
     def unfiltered(self):
         """Return unfiltered version of the repository
 
         Intended to be overwritten by filtered repo."""
         return self
 
     def filtered(self, name, visibilityexceptions=None):
         """Return a filtered version of a repository"""
         cls = repoview.newtype(self.unfiltered().__class__)
         return cls(self, name, visibilityexceptions)
 
     @repofilecache('bookmarks', 'bookmarks.current')
     def _bookmarks(self):
         return bookmarks.bmstore(self)
 
     @property
     def _activebookmark(self):
         return self._bookmarks.active
 
     # _phasesets depend on changelog. what we need is to call
     # _phasecache.invalidate() if '00changelog.i' was changed, but it
     # can't be easily expressed in filecache mechanism.
     @storecache('phaseroots', '00changelog.i')
     def _phasecache(self):
         return phases.phasecache(self, self._phasedefaults)
 
     @storecache('obsstore')
     def obsstore(self):
         return obsolete.makestore(self.ui, self)
 
     @storecache('00changelog.i')
     def changelog(self):
         return changelog.changelog(self.svfs,
                                    trypending=txnutil.mayhavepending(self.root))
 
     @storecache('00manifest.i')
     def manifestlog(self):
         rootstore = manifest.manifestrevlog(self.svfs)
         return manifest.manifestlog(self.svfs, self, rootstore,
                                     self._storenarrowmatch)
 
     @repofilecache('dirstate')
     def dirstate(self):
         return self._makedirstate()
 
     def _makedirstate(self):
         """Extension point for wrapping the dirstate per-repo."""
         sparsematchfn = lambda: sparse.matcher(self)
 
         return dirstate.dirstate(self.vfs, self.ui, self.root,
                                  self._dirstatevalidate, sparsematchfn)
 
     def _dirstatevalidate(self, node):
         try:
             self.changelog.rev(node)
             return node
         except error.LookupError:
             if not self._dirstatevalidatewarned:
                 self._dirstatevalidatewarned = True
                 self.ui.warn(_("warning: ignoring unknown"
                                " working parent %s!\n") % short(node))
             return nullid
 
     @storecache(narrowspec.FILENAME)
     def narrowpats(self):
         """matcher patterns for this repository's narrowspec
 
         A tuple of (includes, excludes).
         """
         return narrowspec.load(self)
 
     @storecache(narrowspec.FILENAME)
     def _storenarrowmatch(self):
         if repository.NARROW_REQUIREMENT not in self.requirements:
             return matchmod.always(self.root, '')
         include, exclude = self.narrowpats
         return narrowspec.match(self.root, include=include, exclude=exclude)
 
     @storecache(narrowspec.FILENAME)
     def _narrowmatch(self):
         if repository.NARROW_REQUIREMENT not in self.requirements:
             return matchmod.always(self.root, '')
         narrowspec.checkworkingcopynarrowspec(self)
         include, exclude = self.narrowpats
         return narrowspec.match(self.root, include=include, exclude=exclude)
 
     def narrowmatch(self, match=None, includeexact=False):
         """matcher corresponding the the repo's narrowspec
 
         If `match` is given, then that will be intersected with the narrow
         matcher.
 
         If `includeexact` is True, then any exact matches from `match` will
         be included even if they're outside the narrowspec.
         """
         if match:
             if includeexact and not self._narrowmatch.always():
                 # do not exclude explicitly-specified paths so that they can
                 # be warned later on
                 em = matchmod.exact(match._root, match._cwd, match.files())
                 nm = matchmod.unionmatcher([self._narrowmatch, em])
                 return matchmod.intersectmatchers(match, nm)
             return matchmod.intersectmatchers(match, self._narrowmatch)
         return self._narrowmatch
 
     def setnarrowpats(self, newincludes, newexcludes):
         narrowspec.save(self, newincludes, newexcludes)
         self.invalidate(clearfilecache=True)
 
     def __getitem__(self, changeid):
         if changeid is None:
             return context.workingctx(self)
         if isinstance(changeid, context.basectx):
             return changeid
         if isinstance(changeid, slice):
             # wdirrev isn't contiguous so the slice shouldn't include it
             return [self[i]
                     for i in pycompat.xrange(*changeid.indices(len(self)))
                     if i not in self.changelog.filteredrevs]
         try:
             if isinstance(changeid, int):
                 node = self.changelog.node(changeid)
                 rev = changeid
             elif changeid == 'null':
                 node = nullid
                 rev = nullrev
             elif changeid == 'tip':
                 node = self.changelog.tip()
                 rev = self.changelog.rev(node)
             elif changeid == '.':
                 # this is a hack to delay/avoid loading obsmarkers
                 # when we know that '.' won't be hidden
                 node = self.dirstate.p1()
                 rev = self.unfiltered().changelog.rev(node)
             elif len(changeid) == 20:
                 try:
                     node = changeid
                     rev = self.changelog.rev(changeid)
                 except error.FilteredLookupError:
                     changeid = hex(changeid) # for the error message
                     raise
                 except LookupError:
                     # check if it might have come from damaged dirstate
                     #
                     # XXX we could avoid the unfiltered if we had a recognizable
                     # exception for filtered changeset access
                     if (self.local()
                         and changeid in self.unfiltered().dirstate.parents()):
                         msg = _("working directory has unknown parent '%s'!")
                         raise error.Abort(msg % short(changeid))
                     changeid = hex(changeid) # for the error message
                     raise
 
             elif len(changeid) == 40:
                 node = bin(changeid)
                 rev = self.changelog.rev(node)
             else:
                 raise error.ProgrammingError(
                         "unsupported changeid '%s' of type %s" %
                         (changeid, type(changeid)))
 
             return context.changectx(self, rev, node)
 
         except (error.FilteredIndexError, error.FilteredLookupError):
             raise error.FilteredRepoLookupError(_("filtered revision '%s'")
                                                 % pycompat.bytestr(changeid))
         except (IndexError, LookupError):
             raise error.RepoLookupError(
                 _("unknown revision '%s'") % pycompat.bytestr(changeid))
         except error.WdirUnsupported:
             return context.workingctx(self)
 
     def __contains__(self, changeid):
         """True if the given changeid exists
 
         error.AmbiguousPrefixLookupError is raised if an ambiguous node
         specified.
         """
         try:
             self[changeid]
             return True
         except error.RepoLookupError:
             return False
 
     def __nonzero__(self):
         return True
 
     __bool__ = __nonzero__
 
     def __len__(self):
         # no need to pay the cost of repoview.changelog
         unfi = self.unfiltered()
         return len(unfi.changelog)
 
     def __iter__(self):
         return iter(self.changelog)
 
     def revs(self, expr, *args):
         '''Find revisions matching a revset.
 
         The revset is specified as a string ``expr`` that may contain
         %-formatting to escape certain types. See ``revsetlang.formatspec``.
 
         Revset aliases from the configuration are not expanded. To expand
         user aliases, consider calling ``scmutil.revrange()`` or
         ``repo.anyrevs([expr], user=True)``.
 
         Returns a revset.abstractsmartset, which is a list-like interface
         that contains integer revisions.
         '''
         tree = revsetlang.spectree(expr, *args)
         return revset.makematcher(tree)(self)
 
     def set(self, expr, *args):
         '''Find revisions matching a revset and emit changectx instances.
 
         This is a convenience wrapper around ``revs()`` that iterates the
         result and is a generator of changectx instances.
 
         Revset aliases from the configuration are not expanded. To expand
         user aliases, consider calling ``scmutil.revrange()``.
         '''
         for r in self.revs(expr, *args):
             yield self[r]
 
     def anyrevs(self, specs, user=False, localalias=None):
         '''Find revisions matching one of the given revsets.
 
         Revset aliases from the configuration are not expanded by default. To
         expand user aliases, specify ``user=True``. To provide some local
         definitions overriding user aliases, set ``localalias`` to
         ``{name: definitionstring}``.
         '''
         if user:
             m = revset.matchany(self.ui, specs,
                                 lookup=revset.lookupfn(self),
                                 localalias=localalias)
         else:
             m = revset.matchany(None, specs, localalias=localalias)
         return m(self)
 
     def url(self):
         return 'file:' + self.root
 
     def hook(self, name, throw=False, **args):
         """Call a hook, passing this repo instance.
 
         This a convenience method to aid invoking hooks. Extensions likely
         won't call this unless they have registered a custom hook or are
         replacing code that is expected to call a hook.
         """
         return hook.hook(self.ui, self, name, throw, **args)
 
     @filteredpropertycache
     def _tagscache(self):
         '''Returns a tagscache object that contains various tags related
         caches.'''
 
         # This simplifies its cache management by having one decorated
         # function (this one) and the rest simply fetch things from it.
         class tagscache(object):
             def __init__(self):
                 # These two define the set of tags for this repository. tags
                 # maps tag name to node; tagtypes maps tag name to 'global' or
                 # 'local'. (Global tags are defined by .hgtags across all
                 # heads, and local tags are defined in .hg/localtags.)
                 # They constitute the in-memory cache of tags.
                 self.tags = self.tagtypes = None
 
                 self.nodetagscache = self.tagslist = None
 
         cache = tagscache()
         cache.tags, cache.tagtypes = self._findtags()
 
         return cache
 
     def tags(self):
         '''return a mapping of tag to node'''
         t = {}
         if self.changelog.filteredrevs:
             tags, tt = self._findtags()
         else:
             tags = self._tagscache.tags
         rev = self.changelog.rev
         for k, v in tags.iteritems():
             try:
                 # ignore tags to unknown nodes
                 rev(v)
                 t[k] = v
             except (error.LookupError, ValueError):
                 pass
         return t
 
     def _findtags(self):
         '''Do the hard work of finding tags.  Return a pair of dicts
         (tags, tagtypes) where tags maps tag name to node, and tagtypes
         maps tag name to a string like \'global\' or \'local\'.
         Subclasses or extensions are free to add their own tags, but
         should be aware that the returned dicts will be retained for the
         duration of the localrepo object.'''
 
         # XXX what tagtype should subclasses/extensions use?  Currently
         # mq and bookmarks add tags, but do not set the tagtype at all.
         # Should each extension invent its own tag type?  Should there
         # be one tagtype for all such "virtual" tags?  Or is the status
         # quo fine?
 
 
         # map tag name to (node, hist)
         alltags = tagsmod.findglobaltags(self.ui, self)
         # map tag name to tag type
         tagtypes = dict((tag, 'global') for tag in alltags)
 
         tagsmod.readlocaltags(self.ui, self, alltags, tagtypes)
 
         # Build the return dicts.  Have to re-encode tag names because
         # the tags module always uses UTF-8 (in order not to lose info
         # writing to the cache), but the rest of Mercurial wants them in
         # local encoding.
         tags = {}
         for (name, (node, hist)) in alltags.iteritems():
             if node != nullid:
                 tags[encoding.tolocal(name)] = node
         tags['tip'] = self.changelog.tip()
         tagtypes = dict([(encoding.tolocal(name), value)
                          for (name, value) in tagtypes.iteritems()])
         return (tags, tagtypes)
 
     def tagtype(self, tagname):
         '''
         return the type of the given tag. result can be:
 
         'local'  : a local tag
         'global' : a global tag
         None     : tag does not exist
         '''
 
         return self._tagscache.tagtypes.get(tagname)
 
     def tagslist(self):
         '''return a list of tags ordered by revision'''
         if not self._tagscache.tagslist:
             l = []
             for t, n in self.tags().iteritems():
                 l.append((self.changelog.rev(n), t, n))
             self._tagscache.tagslist = [(t, n) for r, t, n in sorted(l)]
 
         return self._tagscache.tagslist
 
     def nodetags(self, node):
         '''return the tags associated with a node'''
         if not self._tagscache.nodetagscache:
             nodetagscache = {}
             for t, n in self._tagscache.tags.iteritems():
                 nodetagscache.setdefault(n, []).append(t)
             for tags in nodetagscache.itervalues():
                 tags.sort()
             self._tagscache.nodetagscache = nodetagscache
         return self._tagscache.nodetagscache.get(node, [])
 
     def nodebookmarks(self, node):
         """return the list of bookmarks pointing to the specified node"""
         return self._bookmarks.names(node)
 
     def branchmap(self):
         '''returns a dictionary {branch: [branchheads]} with branchheads
         ordered by increasing revision number'''
         branchmap.updatecache(self)
         return self._branchcaches[self.filtername]
 
     @unfilteredmethod
     def revbranchcache(self):
         if not self._revbranchcache:
             self._revbranchcache = branchmap.revbranchcache(self.unfiltered())
         return self._revbranchcache
 
     def branchtip(self, branch, ignoremissing=False):
         '''return the tip node for a given branch
 
         If ignoremissing is True, then this method will not raise an error.
         This is helpful for callers that only expect None for a missing branch
         (e.g. namespace).
 
         '''
         try:
             return self.branchmap().branchtip(branch)
         except KeyError:
             if not ignoremissing:
                 raise error.RepoLookupError(_("unknown branch '%s'") % branch)
             else:
                 pass
 
     def lookup(self, key):
         return scmutil.revsymbol(self, key).node()
 
     def lookupbranch(self, key):
         if key in self.branchmap():
             return key
 
         return scmutil.revsymbol(self, key).branch()
 
     def known(self, nodes):
         cl = self.changelog
         nm = cl.nodemap
         filtered = cl.filteredrevs
         result = []
         for n in nodes:
             r = nm.get(n)
             resp = not (r is None or r in filtered)
             result.append(resp)
         return result
 
     def local(self):
         return self
 
     def publishing(self):
         # it's safe (and desirable) to trust the publish flag unconditionally
         # so that we don't finalize changes shared between users via ssh or nfs
         return self.ui.configbool('phases', 'publish', untrusted=True)
 
     def cancopy(self):
         # so statichttprepo's override of local() works
         if not self.local():
             return False
         if not self.publishing():
             return True
         # if publishing we can't copy if there is filtered content
         return not self.filtered('visible').changelog.filteredrevs
 
     def shared(self):
         '''the type of shared repository (None if not shared)'''
         if self.sharedpath != self.path:
             return 'store'
         return None
 
     def wjoin(self, f, *insidef):
         return self.vfs.reljoin(self.root, f, *insidef)
 
     def setparents(self, p1, p2=nullid):
         with self.dirstate.parentchange():
             copies = self.dirstate.setparents(p1, p2)
             pctx = self[p1]
             if copies:
                 # Adjust copy records, the dirstate cannot do it, it
                 # requires access to parents manifests. Preserve them
                 # only for entries added to first parent.
                 for f in copies:
                     if f not in pctx and copies[f] in pctx:
                         self.dirstate.copy(copies[f], f)
             if p2 == nullid:
                 for f, s in sorted(self.dirstate.copies().items()):
                     if f not in pctx and s not in pctx:
                         self.dirstate.copy(None, f)
 
     def filectx(self, path, changeid=None, fileid=None, changectx=None):
         """changeid must be a changeset revision, if specified.
            fileid can be a file revision or node."""
         return context.filectx(self, path, changeid, fileid,
                                changectx=changectx)
 
     def getcwd(self):
         return self.dirstate.getcwd()
 
     def pathto(self, f, cwd=None):
         return self.dirstate.pathto(f, cwd)
 
     def _loadfilter(self, filter):
         if filter not in self._filterpats:
             l = []
             for pat, cmd in self.ui.configitems(filter):
                 if cmd == '!':
                     continue
                 mf = matchmod.match(self.root, '', [pat])
                 fn = None
                 params = cmd
                 for name, filterfn in self._datafilters.iteritems():
                     if cmd.startswith(name):
                         fn = filterfn
                         params = cmd[len(name):].lstrip()
                         break
                 if not fn:
                     fn = lambda s, c, **kwargs: procutil.filter(s, c)
                 # Wrap old filters not supporting keyword arguments
                 if not pycompat.getargspec(fn)[2]:
                     oldfn = fn
                     fn = lambda s, c, **kwargs: oldfn(s, c)
                 l.append((mf, fn, params))
             self._filterpats[filter] = l
         return self._filterpats[filter]
 
     def _filter(self, filterpats, filename, data):
         for mf, fn, cmd in filterpats:
             if mf(filename):
                 self.ui.debug("filtering %s through %s\n" % (filename, cmd))
                 data = fn(data, cmd, ui=self.ui, repo=self, filename=filename)
                 break
 
         return data
 
     @unfilteredpropertycache
     def _encodefilterpats(self):
         return self._loadfilter('encode')
 
     @unfilteredpropertycache
     def _decodefilterpats(self):
         return self._loadfilter('decode')
 
     def adddatafilter(self, name, filter):
         self._datafilters[name] = filter
 
     def wread(self, filename):
         if self.wvfs.islink(filename):
             data = self.wvfs.readlink(filename)
         else:
             data = self.wvfs.read(filename)
         return self._filter(self._encodefilterpats, filename, data)
 
     def wwrite(self, filename, data, flags, backgroundclose=False, **kwargs):
         """write ``data`` into ``filename`` in the working directory
 
         This returns length of written (maybe decoded) data.
         """
         data = self._filter(self._decodefilterpats, filename, data)
         if 'l' in flags:
             self.wvfs.symlink(data, filename)
         else:
             self.wvfs.write(filename, data, backgroundclose=backgroundclose,
                             **kwargs)
             if 'x' in flags:
                 self.wvfs.setflags(filename, False, True)
             else:
                 self.wvfs.setflags(filename, False, False)
         return len(data)
 
     def wwritedata(self, filename, data):
         return self._filter(self._decodefilterpats, filename, data)
 
     def currenttransaction(self):
         """return the current transaction or None if non exists"""
         if self._transref:
             tr = self._transref()
         else:
             tr = None
 
         if tr and tr.running():
             return tr
         return None
 
     def transaction(self, desc, report=None):
         if (self.ui.configbool('devel', 'all-warnings')
                 or self.ui.configbool('devel', 'check-locks')):
             if self._currentlock(self._lockref) is None:
                 raise error.ProgrammingError('transaction requires locking')
         tr = self.currenttransaction()
         if tr is not None:
             return tr.nest(name=desc)
 
         # abort here if the journal already exists
         if self.svfs.exists("journal"):
             raise error.RepoError(
                 _("abandoned transaction found"),
                 hint=_("run 'hg recover' to clean up transaction"))
 
         idbase = "%.40f#%f" % (random.random(), time.time())
         ha = hex(hashlib.sha1(idbase).digest())
         txnid = 'TXN:' + ha
         self.hook('pretxnopen', throw=True, txnname=desc, txnid=txnid)
 
         self._writejournal(desc)
         renames = [(vfs, x, undoname(x)) for vfs, x in self._journalfiles()]
         if report:
             rp = report
         else:
             rp = self.ui.warn
         vfsmap = {'plain': self.vfs, 'store': self.svfs} # root of .hg/
         # we must avoid cyclic reference between repo and transaction.
         reporef = weakref.ref(self)
         # Code to track tag movement
         #
         # Since tags are all handled as file content, it is actually quite hard
         # to track these movement from a code perspective. So we fallback to a
         # tracking at the repository level. One could envision to track changes
         # to the '.hgtags' file through changegroup apply but that fails to
         # cope with case where transaction expose new heads without changegroup
         # being involved (eg: phase movement).
         #
         # For now, We gate the feature behind a flag since this likely comes
         # with performance impacts. The current code run more often than needed
         # and do not use caches as much as it could.  The current focus is on
         # the behavior of the feature so we disable it by default. The flag
         # will be removed when we are happy with the performance impact.
         #
         # Once this feature is no longer experimental move the following
         # documentation to the appropriate help section:
         #
         # The ``HG_TAG_MOVED`` variable will be set if the transaction touched
         # tags (new or changed or deleted tags). In addition the details of
         # these changes are made available in a file at:
         #     ``REPOROOT/.hg/changes/tags.changes``.
         # Make sure you check for HG_TAG_MOVED before reading that file as it
         # might exist from a previous transaction even if no tag were touched
         # in this one. Changes are recorded in a line base format::
         #
         #     <action> <hex-node> <tag-name>\n
         #
         # Actions are defined as follow:
         #   "-R": tag is removed,
         #   "+A": tag is added,
         #   "-M": tag is moved (old value),
         #   "+M": tag is moved (new value),
         tracktags = lambda x: None
         # experimental config: experimental.hook-track-tags
         shouldtracktags = self.ui.configbool('experimental', 'hook-track-tags')
         if desc != 'strip' and shouldtracktags:
             oldheads = self.changelog.headrevs()
             def tracktags(tr2):
                 repo = reporef()
                 oldfnodes = tagsmod.fnoderevs(repo.ui, repo, oldheads)
                 newheads = repo.changelog.headrevs()
                 newfnodes = tagsmod.fnoderevs(repo.ui, repo, newheads)
                 # notes: we compare lists here.
                 # As we do it only once buiding set would not be cheaper
                 changes = tagsmod.difftags(repo.ui, repo, oldfnodes, newfnodes)
                 if changes:
                     tr2.hookargs['tag_moved'] = '1'
                     with repo.vfs('changes/tags.changes', 'w',
                                   atomictemp=True) as changesfile:
                         # note: we do not register the file to the transaction
                         # because we needs it to still exist on the transaction
                         # is close (for txnclose hooks)
                         tagsmod.writediff(changesfile, changes)
         def validate(tr2):
             """will run pre-closing hooks"""
             # XXX the transaction API is a bit lacking here so we take a hacky
             # path for now
             #
             # We cannot add this as a "pending" hooks since the 'tr.hookargs'
             # dict is copied before these run. In addition we needs the data
             # available to in memory hooks too.
             #
             # Moreover, we also need to make sure this runs before txnclose
             # hooks and there is no "pending" mechanism that would execute
             # logic only if hooks are about to run.
             #
             # Fixing this limitation of the transaction is also needed to track
             # other families of changes (bookmarks, phases, obsolescence).
             #
             # This will have to be fixed before we remove the experimental
             # gating.
             tracktags(tr2)
             repo = reporef()
             if repo.ui.configbool('experimental', 'single-head-per-branch'):
                 scmutil.enforcesinglehead(repo, tr2, desc)
             if hook.hashook(repo.ui, 'pretxnclose-bookmark'):
                 for name, (old, new) in sorted(tr.changes['bookmarks'].items()):
                     args = tr.hookargs.copy()
                     args.update(bookmarks.preparehookargs(name, old, new))
                     repo.hook('pretxnclose-bookmark', throw=True,
                               txnname=desc,
                               **pycompat.strkwargs(args))
             if hook.hashook(repo.ui, 'pretxnclose-phase'):
                 cl = repo.unfiltered().changelog
                 for rev, (old, new) in tr.changes['phases'].items():
                     args = tr.hookargs.copy()
                     node = hex(cl.node(rev))
                     args.update(phases.preparehookargs(node, old, new))
                     repo.hook('pretxnclose-phase', throw=True, txnname=desc,
                               **pycompat.strkwargs(args))
 
             repo.hook('pretxnclose', throw=True,
                       txnname=desc, **pycompat.strkwargs(tr.hookargs))
         def releasefn(tr, success):
             repo = reporef()
             if success:
                 # this should be explicitly invoked here, because
                 # in-memory changes aren't written out at closing
                 # transaction, if tr.addfilegenerator (via
                 # dirstate.write or so) isn't invoked while
                 # transaction running
                 repo.dirstate.write(None)
             else:
                 # discard all changes (including ones already written
                 # out) in this transaction
                 narrowspec.restorebackup(self, 'journal.narrowspec')
                 narrowspec.restorewcbackup(self, 'journal.narrowspec.dirstate')
                 repo.dirstate.restorebackup(None, 'journal.dirstate')
 
                 repo.invalidate(clearfilecache=True)
 
         tr = transaction.transaction(rp, self.svfs, vfsmap,
                                      "journal",
                                      "undo",
                                      aftertrans(renames),
                                      self.store.createmode,
                                      validator=validate,
                                      releasefn=releasefn,
                                      checkambigfiles=_cachedfiles,
                                      name=desc)
         tr.changes['origrepolen'] = len(self)
         tr.changes['obsmarkers'] = set()
         tr.changes['phases'] = {}
         tr.changes['bookmarks'] = {}
 
         tr.hookargs['txnid'] = txnid
         # note: writing the fncache only during finalize mean that the file is
         # outdated when running hooks. As fncache is used for streaming clone,
         # this is not expected to break anything that happen during the hooks.
         tr.addfinalize('flush-fncache', self.store.write)
         def txnclosehook(tr2):
             """To be run if transaction is successful, will schedule a hook run
             """
             # Don't reference tr2 in hook() so we don't hold a reference.
             # This reduces memory consumption when there are multiple
             # transactions per lock. This can likely go away if issue5045
             # fixes the function accumulation.
             hookargs = tr2.hookargs
 
             def hookfunc():
                 repo = reporef()
                 if hook.hashook(repo.ui, 'txnclose-bookmark'):
                     bmchanges = sorted(tr.changes['bookmarks'].items())
                     for name, (old, new) in bmchanges:
                         args = tr.hookargs.copy()
                         args.update(bookmarks.preparehookargs(name, old, new))
                         repo.hook('txnclose-bookmark', throw=False,
                                   txnname=desc, **pycompat.strkwargs(args))
 
                 if hook.hashook(repo.ui, 'txnclose-phase'):
                     cl = repo.unfiltered().changelog
                     phasemv = sorted(tr.changes['phases'].items())
                     for rev, (old, new) in phasemv:
                         args = tr.hookargs.copy()
                         node = hex(cl.node(rev))
                         args.update(phases.preparehookargs(node, old, new))
                         repo.hook('txnclose-phase', throw=False, txnname=desc,
                                   **pycompat.strkwargs(args))
 
                 repo.hook('txnclose', throw=False, txnname=desc,
                           **pycompat.strkwargs(hookargs))
             reporef()._afterlock(hookfunc)
         tr.addfinalize('txnclose-hook', txnclosehook)
         # Include a leading "-" to make it happen before the transaction summary
         # reports registered via scmutil.registersummarycallback() whose names
         # are 00-txnreport etc. That way, the caches will be warm when the
         # callbacks run.
         tr.addpostclose('-warm-cache', self._buildcacheupdater(tr))
         def txnaborthook(tr2):
             """To be run if transaction is aborted
             """
             reporef().hook('txnabort', throw=False, txnname=desc,
                            **pycompat.strkwargs(tr2.hookargs))
         tr.addabort('txnabort-hook', txnaborthook)
         # avoid eager cache invalidation. in-memory data should be identical
         # to stored data if transaction has no error.
         tr.addpostclose('refresh-filecachestats', self._refreshfilecachestats)
         self._transref = weakref.ref(tr)
         scmutil.registersummarycallback(self, tr, desc)
         return tr
 
     def _journalfiles(self):
         return ((self.svfs, 'journal'),
                 (self.svfs, 'journal.narrowspec'),
                 (self.vfs, 'journal.narrowspec.dirstate'),
                 (self.vfs, 'journal.dirstate'),
                 (self.vfs, 'journal.branch'),
                 (self.vfs, 'journal.desc'),
                 (self.vfs, 'journal.bookmarks'),
                 (self.svfs, 'journal.phaseroots'))
 
     def undofiles(self):
         return [(vfs, undoname(x)) for vfs, x in self._journalfiles()]
 
     @unfilteredmethod
     def _writejournal(self, desc):
         self.dirstate.savebackup(None, 'journal.dirstate')
         narrowspec.savewcbackup(self, 'journal.narrowspec.dirstate')
         narrowspec.savebackup(self, 'journal.narrowspec')
         self.vfs.write("journal.branch",
                           encoding.fromlocal(self.dirstate.branch()))
         self.vfs.write("journal.desc",
                           "%d\n%s\n" % (len(self), desc))
         self.vfs.write("journal.bookmarks",
                           self.vfs.tryread("bookmarks"))
         self.svfs.write("journal.phaseroots",
                            self.svfs.tryread("phaseroots"))
 
     def recover(self):
         with self.lock():
             if self.svfs.exists("journal"):
                 self.ui.status(_("rolling back interrupted transaction\n"))
                 vfsmap = {'': self.svfs,
                           'plain': self.vfs,}
                 transaction.rollback(self.svfs, vfsmap, "journal",
                                      self.ui.warn,
                                      checkambigfiles=_cachedfiles)
                 self.invalidate()
                 return True
             else:
                 self.ui.warn(_("no interrupted transaction available\n"))
                 return False
 
     def rollback(self, dryrun=False, force=False):
         wlock = lock = dsguard = None
         try:
             wlock = self.wlock()
             lock = self.lock()
             if self.svfs.exists("undo"):
                 dsguard = dirstateguard.dirstateguard(self, 'rollback')
 
                 return self._rollback(dryrun, force, dsguard)
             else:
                 self.ui.warn(_("no rollback information available\n"))
                 return 1
         finally:
             release(dsguard, lock, wlock)
 
     @unfilteredmethod # Until we get smarter cache management
     def _rollback(self, dryrun, force, dsguard):
         ui = self.ui
         try:
             args = self.vfs.read('undo.desc').splitlines()
             (oldlen, desc, detail) = (int(args[0]), args[1], None)
             if len(args) >= 3:
                 detail = args[2]
             oldtip = oldlen - 1
 
             if detail and ui.verbose:
                 msg = (_('repository tip rolled back to revision %d'
                          ' (undo %s: %s)\n')
                        % (oldtip, desc, detail))
             else:
                 msg = (_('repository tip rolled back to revision %d'
                          ' (undo %s)\n')
                        % (oldtip, desc))
         except IOError:
             msg = _('rolling back unknown transaction\n')
             desc = None
 
         if not force and self['.'] != self['tip'] and desc == 'commit':
             raise error.Abort(
                 _('rollback of last commit while not checked out '
                   'may lose data'), hint=_('use -f to force'))
 
         ui.status(msg)
         if dryrun:
             return 0
 
         parents = self.dirstate.parents()
         self.destroying()
         vfsmap = {'plain': self.vfs, '': self.svfs}
         transaction.rollback(self.svfs, vfsmap, 'undo', ui.warn,
                              checkambigfiles=_cachedfiles)
         if self.vfs.exists('undo.bookmarks'):
             self.vfs.rename('undo.bookmarks', 'bookmarks', checkambig=True)
         if self.svfs.exists('undo.phaseroots'):
             self.svfs.rename('undo.phaseroots', 'phaseroots', checkambig=True)
         self.invalidate()
 
         parentgone = (parents[0] not in self.changelog.nodemap or
                       parents[1] not in self.changelog.nodemap)
         if parentgone:
             # prevent dirstateguard from overwriting already restored one
             dsguard.close()
 
             narrowspec.restorebackup(self, 'undo.narrowspec')
             narrowspec.restorewcbackup(self, 'undo.narrowspec.dirstate')
             self.dirstate.restorebackup(None, 'undo.dirstate')
             try:
                 branch = self.vfs.read('undo.branch')
                 self.dirstate.setbranch(encoding.tolocal(branch))
             except IOError:
                 ui.warn(_('named branch could not be reset: '
                           'current branch is still \'%s\'\n')
                         % self.dirstate.branch())
 
             parents = tuple([p.rev() for p in self[None].parents()])
             if len(parents) > 1:
                 ui.status(_('working directory now based on '
                             'revisions %d and %d\n') % parents)
             else:
                 ui.status(_('working directory now based on '
                             'revision %d\n') % parents)
             mergemod.mergestate.clean(self, self['.'].node())
 
         # TODO: if we know which new heads may result from this rollback, pass
         # them to destroy(), which will prevent the branchhead cache from being
         # invalidated.
         self.destroyed()
         return 0
 
     def _buildcacheupdater(self, newtransaction):
         """called during transaction to build the callback updating cache
 
         Lives on the repository to help extension who might want to augment
         this logic. For this purpose, the created transaction is passed to the
         method.
         """
         # we must avoid cyclic reference between repo and transaction.
         reporef = weakref.ref(self)
         def updater(tr):
             repo = reporef()
             repo.updatecaches(tr)
         return updater
 
     @unfilteredmethod
     def updatecaches(self, tr=None, full=False):
         """warm appropriate caches
 
         If this function is called after a transaction closed. The transaction
         will be available in the 'tr' argument. This can be used to selectively
         update caches relevant to the changes in that transaction.
 
         If 'full' is set, make sure all caches the function knows about have
         up-to-date data. Even the ones usually loaded more lazily.
         """
         if tr is not None and tr.hookargs.get('source') == 'strip':
             # During strip, many caches are invalid but
             # later call to `destroyed` will refresh them.
             return
 
         if tr is None or tr.changes['origrepolen'] < len(self):
             # updating the unfiltered branchmap should refresh all the others,
             self.ui.debug('updating the branch cache\n')
             branchmap.updatecache(self.filtered('served'))
 
         if full:
             rbc = self.revbranchcache()
             for r in self.changelog:
                 rbc.branchinfo(r)
             rbc.write()
 
             # ensure the working copy parents are in the manifestfulltextcache
             for ctx in self['.'].parents():
                 ctx.manifest()  # accessing the manifest is enough
 
     def invalidatecaches(self):
 
         if r'_tagscache' in vars(self):
             # can't use delattr on proxy
             del self.__dict__[r'_tagscache']
 
         self.unfiltered()._branchcaches.clear()
         self.invalidatevolatilesets()
         self._sparsesignaturecache.clear()
 
     def invalidatevolatilesets(self):
         self.filteredrevcache.clear()
         obsolete.clearobscaches(self)
 
     def invalidatedirstate(self):
         '''Invalidates the dirstate, causing the next call to dirstate
         to check if it was modified since the last time it was read,
         rereading it if it has.
 
         This is different to dirstate.invalidate() that it doesn't always
         rereads the dirstate. Use dirstate.invalidate() if you want to
         explicitly read the dirstate again (i.e. restoring it to a previous
         known good state).'''
         if hasunfilteredcache(self, r'dirstate'):
             for k in self.dirstate._filecache:
                 try:
                     delattr(self.dirstate, k)
                 except AttributeError:
                     pass
             delattr(self.unfiltered(), r'dirstate')
 
     def invalidate(self, clearfilecache=False):
         '''Invalidates both store and non-store parts other than dirstate
 
         If a transaction is running, invalidation of store is omitted,
         because discarding in-memory changes might cause inconsistency
         (e.g. incomplete fncache causes unintentional failure, but
         redundant one doesn't).
         '''
         unfiltered = self.unfiltered() # all file caches are stored unfiltered
         for k in list(self._filecache.keys()):
             # dirstate is invalidated separately in invalidatedirstate()
             if k == 'dirstate':
                 continue
             if (k == 'changelog' and
                 self.currenttransaction() and
                 self.changelog._delayed):
                 # The changelog object may store unwritten revisions. We don't
                 # want to lose them.
                 # TODO: Solve the problem instead of working around it.
                 continue
 
             if clearfilecache:
                 del self._filecache[k]
             try:
                 delattr(unfiltered, k)
             except AttributeError:
                 pass
         self.invalidatecaches()
         if not self.currenttransaction():
             # TODO: Changing contents of store outside transaction
             # causes inconsistency. We should make in-memory store
             # changes detectable, and abort if changed.
             self.store.invalidatecaches()
 
     def invalidateall(self):
         '''Fully invalidates both store and non-store parts, causing the
         subsequent operation to reread any outside changes.'''
         # extension should hook this to invalidate its caches
         self.invalidate()
         self.invalidatedirstate()
 
     @unfilteredmethod
     def _refreshfilecachestats(self, tr):
         """Reload stats of cached files so that they are flagged as valid"""
         for k, ce in self._filecache.items():
             k = pycompat.sysstr(k)
             if k == r'dirstate' or k not in self.__dict__:
                 continue
             ce.refresh()
 
     def _lock(self, vfs, lockname, wait, releasefn, acquirefn, desc,
               inheritchecker=None, parentenvvar=None):
         parentlock = None
         # the contents of parentenvvar are used by the underlying lock to
         # determine whether it can be inherited
         if parentenvvar is not None:
             parentlock = encoding.environ.get(parentenvvar)
 
         timeout = 0
         warntimeout = 0
         if wait:
             timeout = self.ui.configint("ui", "timeout")
             warntimeout = self.ui.configint("ui", "timeout.warn")
         # internal config: ui.signal-safe-lock
         signalsafe = self.ui.configbool('ui', 'signal-safe-lock')
 
         l = lockmod.trylock(self.ui, vfs, lockname, timeout, warntimeout,
                             releasefn=releasefn,
                             acquirefn=acquirefn, desc=desc,
                             inheritchecker=inheritchecker,
                             parentlock=parentlock,
                             signalsafe=signalsafe)
         return l
 
     def _afterlock(self, callback):
         """add a callback to be run when the repository is fully unlocked
 
         The callback will be executed when the outermost lock is released
         (with wlock being higher level than 'lock')."""
         for ref in (self._wlockref, self._lockref):
             l = ref and ref()
             if l and l.held:
                 l.postrelease.append(callback)
                 break
         else: # no lock have been found.
             callback()
 
     def lock(self, wait=True):
         '''Lock the repository store (.hg/store) and return a weak reference
         to the lock. Use this before modifying the store (e.g. committing or
         stripping). If you are opening a transaction, get a lock as well.)
 
         If both 'lock' and 'wlock' must be acquired, ensure you always acquires
         'wlock' first to avoid a dead-lock hazard.'''
         l = self._currentlock(self._lockref)
         if l is not None:
             l.lock()
             return l
 
         l = self._lock(self.svfs, "lock", wait, None,
                        self.invalidate, _('repository %s') % self.origroot)
         self._lockref = weakref.ref(l)
         return l
 
     def _wlockchecktransaction(self):
         if self.currenttransaction() is not None:
             raise error.LockInheritanceContractViolation(
                 'wlock cannot be inherited in the middle of a transaction')
 
     def wlock(self, wait=True):
         '''Lock the non-store parts of the repository (everything under
         .hg except .hg/store) and return a weak reference to the lock.
 
         Use this before modifying files in .hg.
 
         If both 'lock' and 'wlock' must be acquired, ensure you always acquires
         'wlock' first to avoid a dead-lock hazard.'''
         l = self._wlockref and self._wlockref()
         if l is not None and l.held:
             l.lock()
             return l
 
         # We do not need to check for non-waiting lock acquisition.  Such
         # acquisition would not cause dead-lock as they would just fail.
         if wait and (self.ui.configbool('devel', 'all-warnings')
                      or self.ui.configbool('devel', 'check-locks')):
             if self._currentlock(self._lockref) is not None:
                 self.ui.develwarn('"wlock" acquired after "lock"')
 
         def unlock():
             if self.dirstate.pendingparentchange():
                 self.dirstate.invalidate()
             else:
                 self.dirstate.write(None)
 
             self._filecache['dirstate'].refresh()
 
         l = self._lock(self.vfs, "wlock", wait, unlock,
                        self.invalidatedirstate, _('working directory of %s') %
                        self.origroot,
                        inheritchecker=self._wlockchecktransaction,
                        parentenvvar='HG_WLOCK_LOCKER')
         self._wlockref = weakref.ref(l)
         return l
 
     def _currentlock(self, lockref):
         """Returns the lock if it's held, or None if it's not."""
         if lockref is None:
             return None
         l = lockref()
         if l is None or not l.held:
             return None
         return l
 
     def currentwlock(self):
         """Returns the wlock if it's held, or None if it's not."""
         return self._currentlock(self._wlockref)
 
     def _filecommit(self, fctx, manifest1, manifest2, linkrev, tr, changelist):
         """
         commit an individual file as part of a larger transaction
         """
 
         fname = fctx.path()
         fparent1 = manifest1.get(fname, nullid)
         fparent2 = manifest2.get(fname, nullid)
         if isinstance(fctx, context.filectx):
             node = fctx.filenode()
             if node in [fparent1, fparent2]:
                 self.ui.debug('reusing %s filelog entry\n' % fname)
                 if manifest1.flags(fname) != fctx.flags():
                     changelist.append(fname)
                 return node
 
         flog = self.file(fname)
         meta = {}
         copy = fctx.renamed()
         if copy and copy[0] != fname:
             # Mark the new revision of this file as a copy of another
             # file.  This copy data will effectively act as a parent
             # of this new revision.  If this is a merge, the first
             # parent will be the nullid (meaning "look up the copy data")
             # and the second one will be the other parent.  For example:
             #
             # 0 --- 1 --- 3   rev1 changes file foo
             #   \       /     rev2 renames foo to bar and changes it
             #    \- 2 -/      rev3 should have bar with all changes and
             #                      should record that bar descends from
             #                      bar in rev2 and foo in rev1
             #
             # this allows this merge to succeed:
             #
             # 0 --- 1 --- 3   rev4 reverts the content change from rev2
             #   \       /     merging rev3 and rev4 should use bar@rev2
             #    \- 2 --- 4        as the merge base
             #
 
             cfname = copy[0]
             crev = manifest1.get(cfname)
             newfparent = fparent2
 
             if manifest2: # branch merge
                 if fparent2 == nullid or crev is None: # copied on remote side
                     if cfname in manifest2:
                         crev = manifest2[cfname]
                         newfparent = fparent1
 
             # Here, we used to search backwards through history to try to find
             # where the file copy came from if the source of a copy was not in
             # the parent directory. However, this doesn't actually make sense to
             # do (what does a copy from something not in your working copy even
             # mean?) and it causes bugs (eg, issue4476). Instead, we will warn
             # the user that copy information was dropped, so if they didn't
             # expect this outcome it can be fixed, but this is the correct
             # behavior in this circumstance.
 
             if crev:
                 self.ui.debug(" %s: copy %s:%s\n" % (fname, cfname, hex(crev)))
                 meta["copy"] = cfname
                 meta["copyrev"] = hex(crev)
                 fparent1, fparent2 = nullid, newfparent
             else:
                 self.ui.warn(_("warning: can't find ancestor for '%s' "
                                "copied from '%s'!\n") % (fname, cfname))
 
         elif fparent1 == nullid:
             fparent1, fparent2 = fparent2, nullid
         elif fparent2 != nullid:
             # is one parent an ancestor of the other?
             fparentancestors = flog.commonancestorsheads(fparent1, fparent2)
             if fparent1 in fparentancestors:
                 fparent1, fparent2 = fparent2, nullid
             elif fparent2 in fparentancestors:
                 fparent2 = nullid
 
         # is the file changed?
         text = fctx.data()
         if fparent2 != nullid or flog.cmp(fparent1, text) or meta:
             changelist.append(fname)
             return flog.add(text, meta, tr, linkrev, fparent1, fparent2)
         # are just the flags changed during merge?
         elif fname in manifest1 and manifest1.flags(fname) != fctx.flags():
             changelist.append(fname)
 
         return fparent1
 
     def checkcommitpatterns(self, wctx, vdirs, match, status, fail):
         """check for commit arguments that aren't committable"""
         if match.isexact() or match.prefix():
             matched = set(status.modified + status.added + status.removed)
 
             for f in match.files():
                 f = self.dirstate.normalize(f)
                 if f == '.' or f in matched or f in wctx.substate:
                     continue
                 if f in status.deleted:
                     fail(f, _('file not found!'))
                 if f in vdirs: # visited directory
                     d = f + '/'
                     for mf in matched:
                         if mf.startswith(d):
                             break
                     else:
                         fail(f, _("no match under directory!"))
                 elif f not in self.dirstate:
                     fail(f, _("file not tracked!"))
 
     @unfilteredmethod
     def commit(self, text="", user=None, date=None, match=None, force=False,
                editor=False, extra=None):
         """Add a new revision to current repository.
 
         Revision information is gathered from the working directory,
         match can be used to filter the committed files. If editor is
         supplied, it is called to get a commit message.
         """
         if extra is None:
             extra = {}
 
         def fail(f, msg):
             raise error.Abort('%s: %s' % (f, msg))
 
         if not match:
             match = matchmod.always(self.root, '')
 
         if not force:
             vdirs = []
             match.explicitdir = vdirs.append
             match.bad = fail
 
         wlock = lock = tr = None
         try:
             wlock = self.wlock()
             lock = self.lock() # for recent changelog (see issue4368)
 
             wctx = self[None]
             merge = len(wctx.parents()) > 1
 
             if not force and merge and not match.always():
                 raise error.Abort(_('cannot partially commit a merge '
                                    '(do not specify files or patterns)'))
 
             status = self.status(match=match, clean=force)
             if force:
                 status.modified.extend(status.clean) # mq may commit clean files
 
             # check subrepos
             subs, commitsubs, newstate = subrepoutil.precommit(
                 self.ui, wctx, status, match, force=force)
 
             # make sure all explicit patterns are matched
             if not force:
                 self.checkcommitpatterns(wctx, vdirs, match, status, fail)
 
             cctx = context.workingcommitctx(self, status,
                                             text, user, date, extra)
 
             # internal config: ui.allowemptycommit
             allowemptycommit = (wctx.branch() != wctx.p1().branch()
                                 or extra.get('close') or merge or cctx.files()
                                 or self.ui.configbool('ui', 'allowemptycommit'))
             if not allowemptycommit:
                 return None
 
             if merge and cctx.deleted():
                 raise error.Abort(_("cannot commit merge with missing files"))
 
             ms = mergemod.mergestate.read(self)
             mergeutil.checkunresolved(ms)
 
             if editor:
                 cctx._text = editor(self, cctx, subs)
             edited = (text != cctx._text)
 
             # Save commit message in case this transaction gets rolled back
             # (e.g. by a pretxncommit hook).  Leave the content alone on
             # the assumption that the user will use the same editor again.
             msgfn = self.savecommitmessage(cctx._text)
 
             # commit subs and write new state
             if subs:
                 for s in sorted(commitsubs):
                     sub = wctx.sub(s)
                     self.ui.status(_('committing subrepository %s\n') %
                                    subrepoutil.subrelpath(sub))
                     sr = sub.commit(cctx._text, user, date)
                     newstate[s] = (newstate[s][0], sr)
                 subrepoutil.writestate(self, newstate)
 
             p1, p2 = self.dirstate.parents()
             hookp1, hookp2 = hex(p1), (p2 != nullid and hex(p2) or '')
             try:
                 self.hook("precommit", throw=True, parent1=hookp1,
                           parent2=hookp2)
                 tr = self.transaction('commit')
                 ret = self.commitctx(cctx, True)
             except: # re-raises
                 if edited:
                     self.ui.write(
                         _('note: commit message saved in %s\n') % msgfn)
                 raise
             # update bookmarks, dirstate and mergestate
             bookmarks.update(self, [p1, p2], ret)
             cctx.markcommitted(ret)
             ms.reset()
             tr.close()
 
         finally:
             lockmod.release(tr, lock, wlock)
 
         def commithook(node=hex(ret), parent1=hookp1, parent2=hookp2):
             # hack for command that use a temporary commit (eg: histedit)
             # temporary commit got stripped before hook release
             if self.changelog.hasnode(ret):
                 self.hook("commit", node=node, parent1=parent1,
                           parent2=parent2)
         self._afterlock(commithook)
         return ret
 
     @unfilteredmethod
     def commitctx(self, ctx, error=False):
         """Add a new revision to current repository.
         Revision information is passed via the context argument.
 
         ctx.files() should list all files involved in this commit, i.e.
         modified/added/removed files. On merge, it may be wider than the
         ctx.files() to be committed, since any file nodes derived directly
         from p1 or p2 are excluded from the committed ctx.files().
         """
 
         tr = None
         p1, p2 = ctx.p1(), ctx.p2()
         user = ctx.user()
 
         lock = self.lock()
         try:
             tr = self.transaction("commit")
             trp = weakref.proxy(tr)
 
             if ctx.manifestnode():
                 # reuse an existing manifest revision
                 self.ui.debug('reusing known manifest\n')
                 mn = ctx.manifestnode()
                 files = ctx.files()
             elif ctx.files():
                 m1ctx = p1.manifestctx()
                 m2ctx = p2.manifestctx()
                 mctx = m1ctx.copy()
 
                 m = mctx.read()
                 m1 = m1ctx.read()
                 m2 = m2ctx.read()
 
                 # check in files
                 added = []
                 changed = []
                 removed = list(ctx.removed())
                 linkrev = len(self)
                 self.ui.note(_("committing files:\n"))
                 for f in sorted(ctx.modified() + ctx.added()):
                     self.ui.note(f + "\n")
                     try:
                         fctx = ctx[f]
                         if fctx is None:
                             removed.append(f)
                         else:
                             added.append(f)
                             m[f] = self._filecommit(fctx, m1, m2, linkrev,
                                                     trp, changed)
                             m.setflag(f, fctx.flags())
                     except OSError as inst:
                         self.ui.warn(_("trouble committing %s!\n") % f)
                         raise
                     except IOError as inst:
                         errcode = getattr(inst, 'errno', errno.ENOENT)
                         if error or errcode and errcode != errno.ENOENT:
                             self.ui.warn(_("trouble committing %s!\n") % f)
                         raise
 
                 # update manifest
                 removed = [f for f in sorted(removed) if f in m1 or f in m2]
                 drop = [f for f in removed if f in m]
                 for f in drop:
                     del m[f]
                 files = changed + removed
                 md = None
                 if not files:
                     # if no "files" actually changed in terms of the changelog,
                     # try hard to detect unmodified manifest entry so that the
                     # exact same commit can be reproduced later on convert.
                     md = m1.diff(m, scmutil.matchfiles(self, ctx.files()))
                 if not files and md:
                     self.ui.debug('not reusing manifest (no file change in '
                                   'changelog, but manifest differs)\n')
                 if files or md:
                     self.ui.note(_("committing manifest\n"))
                     # we're using narrowmatch here since it's already applied at
                     # other stages (such as dirstate.walk), so we're already
                     # ignoring things outside of narrowspec in most cases. The
                     # one case where we might have files outside the narrowspec
                     # at this point is merges, and we already error out in the
                     # case where the merge has files outside of the narrowspec,
                     # so this is safe.
                     mn = mctx.write(trp, linkrev,
                                     p1.manifestnode(), p2.manifestnode(),
                                     added, drop, match=self.narrowmatch())
                 else:
                     self.ui.debug('reusing manifest form p1 (listed files '
                                   'actually unchanged)\n')
                     mn = p1.manifestnode()
             else:
                 self.ui.debug('reusing manifest from p1 (no file change)\n')
                 mn = p1.manifestnode()
                 files = []
 
             # update changelog
             self.ui.note(_("committing changelog\n"))
             self.changelog.delayupdate(tr)
             n = self.changelog.add(mn, files, ctx.description(),
                                    trp, p1.node(), p2.node(),
                                    user, ctx.date(), ctx.extra().copy())
             xp1, xp2 = p1.hex(), p2 and p2.hex() or ''
             self.hook('pretxncommit', throw=True, node=hex(n), parent1=xp1,
                       parent2=xp2)
             # set the new commit is proper phase
             targetphase = subrepoutil.newcommitphase(self.ui, ctx)
             if targetphase:
                 # retract boundary do not alter parent changeset.
                 # if a parent have higher the resulting phase will
                 # be compliant anyway
                 #
                 # if minimal phase was 0 we don't need to retract anything
                 phases.registernew(self, tr, targetphase, [n])
             tr.close()
             return n
         finally:
             if tr:
                 tr.release()
             lock.release()
 
     @unfilteredmethod
     def destroying(self):
         '''Inform the repository that nodes are about to be destroyed.
         Intended for use by strip and rollback, so there's a common
         place for anything that has to be done before destroying history.
 
         This is mostly useful for saving state that is in memory and waiting
         to be flushed when the current lock is released. Because a call to
         destroyed is imminent, the repo will be invalidated causing those
         changes to stay in memory (waiting for the next unlock), or vanish
         completely.
         '''
         # When using the same lock to commit and strip, the phasecache is left
         # dirty after committing. Then when we strip, the repo is invalidated,
         # causing those changes to disappear.
         if '_phasecache' in vars(self):
             self._phasecache.write()
 
     @unfilteredmethod
     def destroyed(self):
         '''Inform the repository that nodes have been destroyed.
         Intended for use by strip and rollback, so there's a common
         place for anything that has to be done after destroying history.
         '''
         # When one tries to:
         # 1) destroy nodes thus calling this method (e.g. strip)
         # 2) use phasecache somewhere (e.g. commit)
         #
         # then 2) will fail because the phasecache contains nodes that were
         # removed. We can either remove phasecache from the filecache,
         # causing it to reload next time it is accessed, or simply filter
         # the removed nodes now and write the updated cache.
         self._phasecache.filterunknown(self)
         self._phasecache.write()
 
         # refresh all repository caches
         self.updatecaches()
 
         # Ensure the persistent tag cache is updated.  Doing it now
         # means that the tag cache only has to worry about destroyed
         # heads immediately after a strip/rollback.  That in turn
         # guarantees that "cachetip == currenttip" (comparing both rev
         # and node) always means no nodes have been added or destroyed.
 
         # XXX this is suboptimal when qrefresh'ing: we strip the current
         # head, refresh the tag cache, then immediately add a new head.
         # But I think doing it this way is necessary for the "instant
         # tag cache retrieval" case to work.
         self.invalidate()
 
     def status(self, node1='.', node2=None, match=None,
                ignored=False, clean=False, unknown=False,
                listsubrepos=False):
         '''a convenience method that calls node1.status(node2)'''
         return self[node1].status(node2, match, ignored, clean, unknown,
                                   listsubrepos)
 
     def addpostdsstatus(self, ps):
         """Add a callback to run within the wlock, at the point at which status
         fixups happen.
 
         On status completion, callback(wctx, status) will be called with the
         wlock held, unless the dirstate has changed from underneath or the wlock
         couldn't be grabbed.
 
         Callbacks should not capture and use a cached copy of the dirstate --
         it might change in the meanwhile. Instead, they should access the
         dirstate via wctx.repo().dirstate.
 
         This list is emptied out after each status run -- extensions should
         make sure it adds to this list each time dirstate.status is called.
         Extensions should also make sure they don't call this for statuses
         that don't involve the dirstate.
         """
 
         # The list is located here for uniqueness reasons -- it is actually
         # managed by the workingctx, but that isn't unique per-repo.
         self._postdsstatus.append(ps)
 
     def postdsstatus(self):
         """Used by workingctx to get the list of post-dirstate-status hooks."""
         return self._postdsstatus
 
     def clearpostdsstatus(self):
         """Used by workingctx to clear post-dirstate-status hooks."""
         del self._postdsstatus[:]
 
     def heads(self, start=None):
         if start is None:
             cl = self.changelog
             headrevs = reversed(cl.headrevs())
             return [cl.node(rev) for rev in headrevs]
 
         heads = self.changelog.heads(start)
         # sort the output in rev descending order
         return sorted(heads, key=self.changelog.rev, reverse=True)
 
     def branchheads(self, branch=None, start=None, closed=False):
         '''return a (possibly filtered) list of heads for the given branch
 
         Heads are returned in topological order, from newest to oldest.
         If branch is None, use the dirstate branch.
         If start is not None, return only heads reachable from start.
         If closed is True, return heads that are marked as closed as well.
         '''
         if branch is None:
             branch = self[None].branch()
         branches = self.branchmap()
         if branch not in branches:
             return []
         # the cache returns heads ordered lowest to highest
         bheads = list(reversed(branches.branchheads(branch, closed=closed)))
         if start is not None:
             # filter out the heads that cannot be reached from startrev
             fbheads = set(self.changelog.nodesbetween([start], bheads)[2])
             bheads = [h for h in bheads if h in fbheads]
         return bheads
 
     def branches(self, nodes):
         if not nodes:
             nodes = [self.changelog.tip()]
         b = []
         for n in nodes:
             t = n
             while True:
                 p = self.changelog.parents(n)
                 if p[1] != nullid or p[0] == nullid:
                     b.append((t, n, p[0], p[1]))
                     break
                 n = p[0]
         return b
 
     def between(self, pairs):
         r = []
 
         for top, bottom in pairs:
             n, l, i = top, [], 0
             f = 1
 
             while n != bottom and n != nullid:
                 p = self.changelog.parents(n)[0]
                 if i == f:
                     l.append(n)
                     f = f * 2
                 n = p
                 i += 1
 
             r.append(l)
 
         return r
 
     def checkpush(self, pushop):
         """Extensions can override this function if additional checks have
         to be performed before pushing, or call it if they override push
         command.
         """
 
     @unfilteredpropertycache
     def prepushoutgoinghooks(self):
         """Return util.hooks consists of a pushop with repo, remote, outgoing
         methods, which are called before pushing changesets.
         """
         return util.hooks()
 
     def pushkey(self, namespace, key, old, new):
         try:
             tr = self.currenttransaction()
             hookargs = {}
             if tr is not None:
                 hookargs.update(tr.hookargs)
             hookargs = pycompat.strkwargs(hookargs)
             hookargs[r'namespace'] = namespace
             hookargs[r'key'] = key
             hookargs[r'old'] = old
             hookargs[r'new'] = new
             self.hook('prepushkey', throw=True, **hookargs)
         except error.HookAbort as exc:
             self.ui.write_err(_("pushkey-abort: %s\n") % exc)
             if exc.hint:
                 self.ui.write_err(_("(%s)\n") % exc.hint)
             return False
         self.ui.debug('pushing key for "%s:%s"\n' % (namespace, key))
         ret = pushkey.push(self, namespace, key, old, new)
         def runhook():
             self.hook('pushkey', namespace=namespace, key=key, old=old, new=new,
                       ret=ret)
         self._afterlock(runhook)
         return ret
 
     def listkeys(self, namespace):
         self.hook('prelistkeys', throw=True, namespace=namespace)
         self.ui.debug('listing keys for "%s"\n' % namespace)
         values = pushkey.list(self, namespace)
         self.hook('listkeys', namespace=namespace, values=values)
         return values
 
     def debugwireargs(self, one, two, three=None, four=None, five=None):
         '''used to test argument passing over the wire'''
         return "%s %s %s %s %s" % (one, two, pycompat.bytestr(three),
                                    pycompat.bytestr(four),
                                    pycompat.bytestr(five))
 
     def savecommitmessage(self, text):
         fp = self.vfs('last-message.txt', 'wb')
         try:
             fp.write(text)
         finally:
             fp.close()
         return self.pathto(fp.name[len(self.root) + 1:])
 
 # used to avoid circular references so destructors work
 def aftertrans(files):
     renamefiles = [tuple(t) for t in files]
     def a():
         for vfs, src, dest in renamefiles:
             # if src and dest refer to a same file, vfs.rename is a no-op,
             # leaving both src and dest on disk. delete dest to make sure
             # the rename couldn't be such a no-op.
             vfs.tryunlink(dest)
             try:
                 vfs.rename(src, dest)
             except OSError: # journal file does not yet exist
                 pass
     return a
 
 def undoname(fn):
     base, name = os.path.split(fn)
     assert name.startswith('journal')
     return os.path.join(base, name.replace('journal', 'undo', 1))
 
 def instance(ui, path, create, intents=None, createopts=None):
     localpath = util.urllocalpath(path)
     if create:
         createrepository(ui, localpath, createopts=createopts)
 
     return makelocalrepository(ui, localpath, intents=intents)
 
 def islocal(path):
     return True
 
 def defaultcreateopts(ui, createopts=None):
     """Populate the default creation options for a repository.
 
     A dictionary of explicitly requested creation options can be passed
     in. Missing keys will be populated.
     """
     createopts = dict(createopts or {})
 
     if 'backend' not in createopts:
         # experimental config: storage.new-repo-backend
         createopts['backend'] = ui.config('storage', 'new-repo-backend')
 
     return createopts
 
 def newreporequirements(ui, createopts):
     """Determine the set of requirements for a new local repository.
 
     Extensions can wrap this function to specify custom requirements for
     new repositories.
     """
     # If the repo is being created from a shared repository, we copy
     # its requirements.
     if 'sharedrepo' in createopts:
         requirements = set(createopts['sharedrepo'].requirements)
         if createopts.get('sharedrelative'):
             requirements.add('relshared')
         else:
             requirements.add('shared')
 
         return requirements
 
     if 'backend' not in createopts:
         raise error.ProgrammingError('backend key not present in createopts; '
                                      'was defaultcreateopts() called?')
 
     if createopts['backend'] != 'revlogv1':
         raise error.Abort(_('unable to determine repository requirements for '
                             'storage backend: %s') % createopts['backend'])
 
     requirements = {'revlogv1'}
     if ui.configbool('format', 'usestore'):
         requirements.add('store')
         if ui.configbool('format', 'usefncache'):
             requirements.add('fncache')
             if ui.configbool('format', 'dotencode'):
                 requirements.add('dotencode')
 
     compengine = ui.config('experimental', 'format.compression')
     if compengine not in util.compengines:
         raise error.Abort(_('compression engine %s defined by '
                             'experimental.format.compression not available') %
                           compengine,
                           hint=_('run "hg debuginstall" to list available '
                                  'compression engines'))
 
     # zlib is the historical default and doesn't need an explicit requirement.
     if compengine != 'zlib':
         requirements.add('exp-compression-%s' % compengine)
 
     if scmutil.gdinitconfig(ui):
         requirements.add('generaldelta')
-        # experimental config: format.sparse-revlog
         if ui.configbool('format', 'sparse-revlog'):
             requirements.add(SPARSEREVLOG_REQUIREMENT)
     if ui.configbool('experimental', 'treemanifest'):
         requirements.add('treemanifest')
 
     revlogv2 = ui.config('experimental', 'revlogv2')
     if revlogv2 == 'enable-unstable-format-and-corrupt-my-data':
         requirements.remove('revlogv1')
         # generaldelta is implied by revlogv2.
         requirements.discard('generaldelta')
         requirements.add(REVLOGV2_REQUIREMENT)
     # experimental config: format.internal-phase
     if ui.configbool('format', 'internal-phase'):
         requirements.add('internal-phase')
 
     if createopts.get('narrowfiles'):
         requirements.add(repository.NARROW_REQUIREMENT)
 
     if createopts.get('lfs'):
         requirements.add('lfs')
 
     return requirements
 
 def filterknowncreateopts(ui, createopts):
     """Filters a dict of repo creation options against options that are known.
 
     Receives a dict of repo creation options and returns a dict of those
     options that we don't know how to handle.
 
     This function is called as part of repository creation. If the
     returned dict contains any items, repository creation will not
     be allowed, as it means there was a request to create a repository
     with options not recognized by loaded code.
 
     Extensions can wrap this function to filter out creation options
     they know how to handle.
     """
     known = {
         'backend',
         'lfs',
         'narrowfiles',
         'sharedrepo',
         'sharedrelative',
         'shareditems',
         'shallowfilestore',
     }
 
     return {k: v for k, v in createopts.items() if k not in known}
 
 def createrepository(ui, path, createopts=None):
     """Create a new repository in a vfs.
 
     ``path`` path to the new repo's working directory.
     ``createopts`` options for the new repository.
 
     The following keys for ``createopts`` are recognized:
 
     backend
        The storage backend to use.
     lfs
        Repository will be created with ``lfs`` requirement. The lfs extension
        will automatically be loaded when the repository is accessed.
     narrowfiles
        Set up repository to support narrow file storage.
     sharedrepo
        Repository object from which storage should be shared.
     sharedrelative
        Boolean indicating if the path to the shared repo should be
        stored as relative. By default, the pointer to the "parent" repo
        is stored as an absolute path.
     shareditems
        Set of items to share to the new repository (in addition to storage).
     shallowfilestore
        Indicates that storage for files should be shallow (not all ancestor
        revisions are known).
     """
     createopts = defaultcreateopts(ui, createopts=createopts)
 
     unknownopts = filterknowncreateopts(ui, createopts)
 
     if not isinstance(unknownopts, dict):
         raise error.ProgrammingError('filterknowncreateopts() did not return '
                                      'a dict')
 
     if unknownopts:
         raise error.Abort(_('unable to create repository because of unknown '
                             'creation option: %s') %
                           ', '.join(sorted(unknownopts)),
                           hint=_('is a required extension not loaded?'))
 
     requirements = newreporequirements(ui, createopts=createopts)
 
     wdirvfs = vfsmod.vfs(path, expandpath=True, realpath=True)
 
     hgvfs = vfsmod.vfs(wdirvfs.join(b'.hg'))
     if hgvfs.exists():
         raise error.RepoError(_('repository %s already exists') % path)
 
     if 'sharedrepo' in createopts:
         sharedpath = createopts['sharedrepo'].sharedpath
 
         if createopts.get('sharedrelative'):
             try:
                 sharedpath = os.path.relpath(sharedpath, hgvfs.base)
             except (IOError, ValueError) as e:
                 # ValueError is raised on Windows if the drive letters differ
                 # on each path.
                 raise error.Abort(_('cannot calculate relative path'),
                                   hint=stringutil.forcebytestr(e))
 
     if not wdirvfs.exists():
         wdirvfs.makedirs()
 
     hgvfs.makedir(notindexed=True)
     if 'sharedrepo' not in createopts:
         hgvfs.mkdir(b'cache')
     hgvfs.mkdir(b'wcache')
 
     if b'store' in requirements and 'sharedrepo' not in createopts:
         hgvfs.mkdir(b'store')
 
         # We create an invalid changelog outside the store so very old
         # Mercurial versions (which didn't know about the requirements
         # file) encounter an error on reading the changelog. This
         # effectively locks out old clients and prevents them from
         # mucking with a repo in an unknown format.
         #
         # The revlog header has version 2, which won't be recognized by
         # such old clients.
         hgvfs.append(b'00changelog.i',
                      b'\0\0\0\2 dummy changelog to prevent using the old repo '
                      b'layout')
 
     scmutil.writerequires(hgvfs, requirements)
 
     # Write out file telling readers where to find the shared store.
     if 'sharedrepo' in createopts:
         hgvfs.write(b'sharedpath', sharedpath)
 
     if createopts.get('shareditems'):
         shared = b'\n'.join(sorted(createopts['shareditems'])) + b'\n'
         hgvfs.write(b'shared', shared)
 
 def poisonrepository(repo):
     """Poison a repository instance so it can no longer be used."""
     # Perform any cleanup on the instance.
     repo.close()
 
     # Our strategy is to replace the type of the object with one that
     # has all attribute lookups result in error.
     #
     # But we have to allow the close() method because some constructors
     # of repos call close() on repo references.
     class poisonedrepository(object):
         def __getattribute__(self, item):
             if item == r'close':
                 return object.__getattribute__(self, item)
 
             raise error.ProgrammingError('repo instances should not be used '
                                          'after unshare')
 
         def close(self):
             pass
 
     # We may have a repoview, which intercepts __setattr__. So be sure
     # we operate at the lowest level possible.
     object.__setattr__(repo, r'__class__', poisonedrepository)

tests/test-help.t

@@ -1,3826 +1,3828 b''
 Short help:
 
   $ hg
   Mercurial Distributed SCM
   
   basic commands:
   
    add           add the specified files on the next commit
    annotate      show changeset information by line for each file
    clone         make a copy of an existing repository
    commit        commit the specified files or all outstanding changes
    diff          diff repository (or selected files)
    export        dump the header and diffs for one or more changesets
    forget        forget the specified files on the next commit
    init          create a new repository in the given directory
    log           show revision history of entire repository or files
    merge         merge another revision into working directory
    pull          pull changes from the specified source
    push          push changes to the specified destination
    remove        remove the specified files on the next commit
    serve         start stand-alone webserver
    status        show changed files in the working directory
    summary       summarize working directory state
    update        update working directory (or switch revisions)
   
   (use 'hg help' for the full list of commands or 'hg -v' for details)
 
   $ hg -q
    add           add the specified files on the next commit
    annotate      show changeset information by line for each file
    clone         make a copy of an existing repository
    commit        commit the specified files or all outstanding changes
    diff          diff repository (or selected files)
    export        dump the header and diffs for one or more changesets
    forget        forget the specified files on the next commit
    init          create a new repository in the given directory
    log           show revision history of entire repository or files
    merge         merge another revision into working directory
    pull          pull changes from the specified source
    push          push changes to the specified destination
    remove        remove the specified files on the next commit
    serve         start stand-alone webserver
    status        show changed files in the working directory
    summary       summarize working directory state
    update        update working directory (or switch revisions)
 
 Extra extensions will be printed in help output in a non-reliable order since
 the extension is unknown.
 #if no-extraextensions
 
   $ hg help
   Mercurial Distributed SCM
   
   list of commands:
   
   Repository creation:
   
    clone         make a copy of an existing repository
    init          create a new repository in the given directory
   
   Remote repository management:
   
    incoming      show new changesets found in source
    outgoing      show changesets not found in the destination
    paths         show aliases for remote repositories
    pull          pull changes from the specified source
    push          push changes to the specified destination
    serve         start stand-alone webserver
   
   Change creation:
   
    commit        commit the specified files or all outstanding changes
   
   Change manipulation:
   
    backout       reverse effect of earlier changeset
    graft         copy changes from other branches onto the current branch
    merge         merge another revision into working directory
   
   Change organization:
   
    bookmarks     create a new bookmark or list existing bookmarks
    branch        set or show the current branch name
    branches      list repository named branches
    phase         set or show the current phase name
    tag           add one or more tags for the current or given revision
    tags          list repository tags
   
   File content management:
   
    annotate      show changeset information by line for each file
    cat           output the current or given revision of files
    copy          mark files as copied for the next commit
    diff          diff repository (or selected files)
    grep          search revision history for a pattern in specified files
   
   Change navigation:
   
    bisect        subdivision search of changesets
    heads         show branch heads
    identify      identify the working directory or specified revision
    log           show revision history of entire repository or files
   
   Working directory management:
   
    add           add the specified files on the next commit
    addremove     add all new files, delete all missing files
    files         list tracked files
    forget        forget the specified files on the next commit
    remove        remove the specified files on the next commit
    rename        rename files; equivalent of copy + remove
    resolve       redo merges or set/view the merge status of files
    revert        restore files to their checkout state
    root          print the root (top) of the current working directory
    status        show changed files in the working directory
    summary       summarize working directory state
    update        update working directory (or switch revisions)
   
   Change import/export:
   
    archive       create an unversioned archive of a repository revision
    bundle        create a bundle file
    export        dump the header and diffs for one or more changesets
    import        import an ordered set of patches
    unbundle      apply one or more bundle files
   
   Repository maintenance:
   
    manifest      output the current or given revision of the project manifest
    recover       roll back an interrupted transaction
    verify        verify the integrity of the repository
   
   Help:
   
    config        show combined config settings from all hgrc files
    help          show help for a given topic or a help overview
    version       output version and copyright information
   
   additional help topics:
   
   Mercurial identifiers:
   
    filesets      Specifying File Sets
    hgignore      Syntax for Mercurial Ignore Files
    patterns      File Name Patterns
    revisions     Specifying Revisions
    urls          URL Paths
   
   Mercurial output:
   
    color         Colorizing Outputs
    dates         Date Formats
    diffs         Diff Formats
    templating    Template Usage
   
   Mercurial configuration:
   
    config        Configuration Files
    environment   Environment Variables
    extensions    Using Additional Features
    flags         Command-line flags
    hgweb         Configuring hgweb
    merge-tools   Merge Tools
    pager         Pager Support
   
   Concepts:
   
    bundlespec    Bundle File Formats
    glossary      Glossary
    phases        Working with Phases
    subrepos      Subrepositories
   
   Miscellaneous:
   
    deprecated    Deprecated Features
    internals     Technical implementation topics
    scripting     Using Mercurial from scripts and automation
   
   (use 'hg help -v' to show built-in aliases and global options)
 
   $ hg -q help
   Repository creation:
   
    clone         make a copy of an existing repository
    init          create a new repository in the given directory
   
   Remote repository management:
   
    incoming      show new changesets found in source
    outgoing      show changesets not found in the destination
    paths         show aliases for remote repositories
    pull          pull changes from the specified source
    push          push changes to the specified destination
    serve         start stand-alone webserver
   
   Change creation:
   
    commit        commit the specified files or all outstanding changes
   
   Change manipulation:
   
    backout       reverse effect of earlier changeset
    graft         copy changes from other branches onto the current branch
    merge         merge another revision into working directory
   
   Change organization:
   
    bookmarks     create a new bookmark or list existing bookmarks
    branch        set or show the current branch name
    branches      list repository named branches
    phase         set or show the current phase name
    tag           add one or more tags for the current or given revision
    tags          list repository tags
   
   File content management:
   
    annotate      show changeset information by line for each file
    cat           output the current or given revision of files
    copy          mark files as copied for the next commit
    diff          diff repository (or selected files)
    grep          search revision history for a pattern in specified files
   
   Change navigation:
   
    bisect        subdivision search of changesets
    heads         show branch heads
    identify      identify the working directory or specified revision
    log           show revision history of entire repository or files
   
   Working directory management:
   
    add           add the specified files on the next commit
    addremove     add all new files, delete all missing files
    files         list tracked files
    forget        forget the specified files on the next commit
    remove        remove the specified files on the next commit
    rename        rename files; equivalent of copy + remove
    resolve       redo merges or set/view the merge status of files
    revert        restore files to their checkout state
    root          print the root (top) of the current working directory
    status        show changed files in the working directory
    summary       summarize working directory state
    update        update working directory (or switch revisions)
   
   Change import/export:
   
    archive       create an unversioned archive of a repository revision
    bundle        create a bundle file
    export        dump the header and diffs for one or more changesets
    import        import an ordered set of patches
    unbundle      apply one or more bundle files
   
   Repository maintenance:
   
    manifest      output the current or given revision of the project manifest
    recover       roll back an interrupted transaction
    verify        verify the integrity of the repository
   
   Help:
   
    config        show combined config settings from all hgrc files
    help          show help for a given topic or a help overview
    version       output version and copyright information
   
   additional help topics:
   
   Mercurial identifiers:
   
    filesets      Specifying File Sets
    hgignore      Syntax for Mercurial Ignore Files
    patterns      File Name Patterns
    revisions     Specifying Revisions
    urls          URL Paths
   
   Mercurial output:
   
    color         Colorizing Outputs
    dates         Date Formats
    diffs         Diff Formats
    templating    Template Usage
   
   Mercurial configuration:
   
    config        Configuration Files
    environment   Environment Variables
    extensions    Using Additional Features
    flags         Command-line flags
    hgweb         Configuring hgweb
    merge-tools   Merge Tools
    pager         Pager Support
   
   Concepts:
   
    bundlespec    Bundle File Formats
    glossary      Glossary
    phases        Working with Phases
    subrepos      Subrepositories
   
   Miscellaneous:
   
    deprecated    Deprecated Features
    internals     Technical implementation topics
    scripting     Using Mercurial from scripts and automation
 
 Test extension help:
   $ hg help extensions --config extensions.rebase= --config extensions.children=
   Using Additional Features
   """""""""""""""""""""""""
   
       Mercurial has the ability to add new features through the use of
       extensions. Extensions may add new commands, add options to existing
       commands, change the default behavior of commands, or implement hooks.
   
       To enable the "foo" extension, either shipped with Mercurial or in the
       Python search path, create an entry for it in your configuration file,
       like this:
   
         [extensions]
         foo =
   
       You may also specify the full path to an extension:
   
         [extensions]
         myfeature = ~/.hgext/myfeature.py
   
       See 'hg help config' for more information on configuration files.
   
       Extensions are not loaded by default for a variety of reasons: they can
       increase startup overhead; they may be meant for advanced usage only; they
       may provide potentially dangerous abilities (such as letting you destroy
       or modify history); they might not be ready for prime time; or they may
       alter some usual behaviors of stock Mercurial. It is thus up to the user
       to activate extensions as needed.
   
       To explicitly disable an extension enabled in a configuration file of
       broader scope, prepend its path with !:
   
         [extensions]
         # disabling extension bar residing in /path/to/extension/bar.py
         bar = !/path/to/extension/bar.py
         # ditto, but no path was supplied for extension baz
         baz = !
   
       enabled extensions:
   
        children      command to display child changesets (DEPRECATED)
        rebase        command to move sets of revisions to a different ancestor
   
       disabled extensions:
   
        acl           hooks for controlling repository access
        blackbox      log repository events to a blackbox for debugging
        bugzilla      hooks for integrating with the Bugzilla bug tracker
        censor        erase file content at a given revision
        churn         command to display statistics about repository history
        clonebundles  advertise pre-generated bundles to seed clones
        closehead     close arbitrary heads without checking them out first
        convert       import revisions from foreign VCS repositories into
                      Mercurial
        eol           automatically manage newlines in repository files
        extdiff       command to allow external programs to compare revisions
        factotum      http authentication with factotum
        githelp       try mapping git commands to Mercurial commands
        gpg           commands to sign and verify changesets
        hgk           browse the repository in a graphical way
        highlight     syntax highlighting for hgweb (requires Pygments)
        histedit      interactive history editing
        keyword       expand keywords in tracked files
        largefiles    track large binary files
        mq            manage a stack of patches
        notify        hooks for sending email push notifications
        patchbomb     command to send changesets as (a series of) patch emails
        purge         command to delete untracked files from the working
                      directory
        relink        recreates hardlinks between repository clones
        schemes       extend schemes with shortcuts to repository swarms
        share         share a common history between several working directories
        shelve        save and restore changes to the working directory
        strip         strip changesets and their descendants from history
        transplant    command to transplant changesets from another branch
        win32mbcs     allow the use of MBCS paths with problematic encodings
        zeroconf      discover and advertise repositories on the local network
 
 #endif
 
 Verify that deprecated extensions are included if --verbose:
 
   $ hg -v help extensions | grep children
        children      command to display child changesets (DEPRECATED)
 
 Verify that extension keywords appear in help templates
 
   $ hg help --config extensions.transplant= templating|grep transplant > /dev/null
 
 Test short command list with verbose option
 
   $ hg -v help shortlist
   Mercurial Distributed SCM
   
   basic commands:
   
    add           add the specified files on the next commit
    annotate, blame
                  show changeset information by line for each file
    clone         make a copy of an existing repository
    commit, ci    commit the specified files or all outstanding changes
    diff          diff repository (or selected files)
    export        dump the header and diffs for one or more changesets
    forget        forget the specified files on the next commit
    init          create a new repository in the given directory
    log, history  show revision history of entire repository or files
    merge         merge another revision into working directory
    pull          pull changes from the specified source
    push          push changes to the specified destination
    remove, rm    remove the specified files on the next commit
    serve         start stand-alone webserver
    status, st    show changed files in the working directory
    summary, sum  summarize working directory state
    update, up, checkout, co
                  update working directory (or switch revisions)
   
   global options ([+] can be repeated):
   
    -R --repository REPO   repository root directory or name of overlay bundle
                           file
       --cwd DIR           change working directory
    -y --noninteractive    do not prompt, automatically pick the first choice for
                           all prompts
    -q --quiet             suppress output
    -v --verbose           enable additional output
       --color TYPE        when to colorize (boolean, always, auto, never, or
                           debug)
       --config CONFIG [+] set/override config option (use 'section.name=value')
       --debug             enable debugging output
       --debugger          start debugger
       --encoding ENCODE   set the charset encoding (default: ascii)
       --encodingmode MODE set the charset encoding mode (default: strict)
       --traceback         always print a traceback on exception
       --time              time how long the command takes
       --profile           print command execution profile
       --version           output version information and exit
    -h --help              display help and exit
       --hidden            consider hidden changesets
       --pager TYPE        when to paginate (boolean, always, auto, or never)
                           (default: auto)
   
   (use 'hg help' for the full list of commands)
 
   $ hg add -h
   hg add [OPTION]... [FILE]...
   
   add the specified files on the next commit
   
       Schedule files to be version controlled and added to the repository.
   
       The files will be added to the repository at the next commit. To undo an
       add before that, see 'hg forget'.
   
       If no names are given, add all files to the repository (except files
       matching ".hgignore").
   
       Returns 0 if all files are successfully added.
   
   options ([+] can be repeated):
   
    -I --include PATTERN [+] include names matching the given patterns
    -X --exclude PATTERN [+] exclude names matching the given patterns
    -S --subrepos            recurse into subrepositories
    -n --dry-run             do not perform actions, just print output
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
 
 Verbose help for add
 
   $ hg add -hv
   hg add [OPTION]... [FILE]...
   
   add the specified files on the next commit
   
       Schedule files to be version controlled and added to the repository.
   
       The files will be added to the repository at the next commit. To undo an
       add before that, see 'hg forget'.
   
       If no names are given, add all files to the repository (except files
       matching ".hgignore").
   
       Examples:
   
         - New (unknown) files are added automatically by 'hg add':
   
             $ ls
             foo.c
             $ hg status
             ? foo.c
             $ hg add
             adding foo.c
             $ hg status
             A foo.c
   
         - Specific files to be added can be specified:
   
             $ ls
             bar.c  foo.c
             $ hg status
             ? bar.c
             ? foo.c
             $ hg add bar.c
             $ hg status
             A bar.c
             ? foo.c
   
       Returns 0 if all files are successfully added.
   
   options ([+] can be repeated):
   
    -I --include PATTERN [+] include names matching the given patterns
    -X --exclude PATTERN [+] exclude names matching the given patterns
    -S --subrepos            recurse into subrepositories
    -n --dry-run             do not perform actions, just print output
   
   global options ([+] can be repeated):
   
    -R --repository REPO   repository root directory or name of overlay bundle
                           file
       --cwd DIR           change working directory
    -y --noninteractive    do not prompt, automatically pick the first choice for
                           all prompts
    -q --quiet             suppress output
    -v --verbose           enable additional output
       --color TYPE        when to colorize (boolean, always, auto, never, or
                           debug)
       --config CONFIG [+] set/override config option (use 'section.name=value')
       --debug             enable debugging output
       --debugger          start debugger
       --encoding ENCODE   set the charset encoding (default: ascii)
       --encodingmode MODE set the charset encoding mode (default: strict)
       --traceback         always print a traceback on exception
       --time              time how long the command takes
       --profile           print command execution profile
       --version           output version information and exit
    -h --help              display help and exit
       --hidden            consider hidden changesets
       --pager TYPE        when to paginate (boolean, always, auto, or never)
                           (default: auto)
 
 Test the textwidth config option
 
   $ hg root -h  --config ui.textwidth=50
   hg root
   
   print the root (top) of the current working
   directory
   
       Print the root directory of the current
       repository.
   
       Returns 0 on success.
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show
   complete help)
 
 Test help option with version option
 
   $ hg add -h --version
   Mercurial Distributed SCM (version *) (glob)
   (see https://mercurial-scm.org for more information)
   
   Copyright (C) 2005-* Matt Mackall and others (glob)
   This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
   warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
 
   $ hg add --skjdfks
   hg add: option --skjdfks not recognized
   hg add [OPTION]... [FILE]...
   
   add the specified files on the next commit
   
   options ([+] can be repeated):
   
    -I --include PATTERN [+] include names matching the given patterns
    -X --exclude PATTERN [+] exclude names matching the given patterns
    -S --subrepos            recurse into subrepositories
    -n --dry-run             do not perform actions, just print output
   
   (use 'hg add -h' to show more help)
   [255]
 
 Test ambiguous command help
 
   $ hg help ad
   list of commands:
   
    add           add the specified files on the next commit
    addremove     add all new files, delete all missing files
   
   (use 'hg help -v ad' to show built-in aliases and global options)
 
 Test command without options
 
   $ hg help verify
   hg verify
   
   verify the integrity of the repository
   
       Verify the integrity of the current repository.
   
       This will perform an extensive check of the repository's integrity,
       validating the hashes and checksums of each entry in the changelog,
       manifest, and tracked files, as well as the integrity of their crosslinks
       and indices.
   
       Please see https://mercurial-scm.org/wiki/RepositoryCorruption for more
       information about recovery from corruption of the repository.
   
       Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered.
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
 
   $ hg help diff
   hg diff [OPTION]... ([-c REV] | [-r REV1 [-r REV2]]) [FILE]...
   
   diff repository (or selected files)
   
       Show differences between revisions for the specified files.
   
       Differences between files are shown using the unified diff format.
   
       Note:
          'hg diff' may generate unexpected results for merges, as it will
          default to comparing against the working directory's first parent
          changeset if no revisions are specified.
   
       When two revision arguments are given, then changes are shown between
       those revisions. If only one revision is specified then that revision is
       compared to the working directory, and, when no revisions are specified,
       the working directory files are compared to its first parent.
   
       Alternatively you can specify -c/--change with a revision to see the
       changes in that changeset relative to its first parent.
   
       Without the -a/--text option, diff will avoid generating diffs of files it
       detects as binary. With -a, diff will generate a diff anyway, probably
       with undesirable results.
   
       Use the -g/--git option to generate diffs in the git extended diff format.
       For more information, read 'hg help diffs'.
   
       Returns 0 on success.
   
   options ([+] can be repeated):
   
    -r --rev REV [+]         revision
    -c --change REV          change made by revision
    -a --text                treat all files as text
    -g --git                 use git extended diff format
       --binary              generate binary diffs in git mode (default)
       --nodates             omit dates from diff headers
       --noprefix            omit a/ and b/ prefixes from filenames
    -p --show-function       show which function each change is in
       --reverse             produce a diff that undoes the changes
    -w --ignore-all-space    ignore white space when comparing lines
    -b --ignore-space-change ignore changes in the amount of white space
    -B --ignore-blank-lines  ignore changes whose lines are all blank
    -Z --ignore-space-at-eol ignore changes in whitespace at EOL
    -U --unified NUM         number of lines of context to show
       --stat                output diffstat-style summary of changes
       --root DIR            produce diffs relative to subdirectory
    -I --include PATTERN [+] include names matching the given patterns
    -X --exclude PATTERN [+] exclude names matching the given patterns
    -S --subrepos            recurse into subrepositories
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
 
   $ hg help status
   hg status [OPTION]... [FILE]...
   
   aliases: st
   
   show changed files in the working directory
   
       Show status of files in the repository. If names are given, only files
       that match are shown. Files that are clean or ignored or the source of a
       copy/move operation, are not listed unless -c/--clean, -i/--ignored,
       -C/--copies or -A/--all are given. Unless options described with "show
       only ..." are given, the options -mardu are used.
   
       Option -q/--quiet hides untracked (unknown and ignored) files unless
       explicitly requested with -u/--unknown or -i/--ignored.
   
       Note:
          'hg status' may appear to disagree with diff if permissions have
          changed or a merge has occurred. The standard diff format does not
          report permission changes and diff only reports changes relative to one
          merge parent.
   
       If one revision is given, it is used as the base revision. If two
       revisions are given, the differences between them are shown. The --change
       option can also be used as a shortcut to list the changed files of a
       revision from its first parent.
   
       The codes used to show the status of files are:
   
         M = modified
         A = added
         R = removed
         C = clean
         ! = missing (deleted by non-hg command, but still tracked)
         ? = not tracked
         I = ignored
           = origin of the previous file (with --copies)
   
       Returns 0 on success.
   
   options ([+] can be repeated):
   
    -A --all                 show status of all files
    -m --modified            show only modified files
    -a --added               show only added files
    -r --removed             show only removed files
    -d --deleted             show only deleted (but tracked) files
    -c --clean               show only files without changes
    -u --unknown             show only unknown (not tracked) files
    -i --ignored             show only ignored files
    -n --no-status           hide status prefix
    -C --copies              show source of copied files
    -0 --print0              end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs
       --rev REV [+]         show difference from revision
       --change REV          list the changed files of a revision
    -I --include PATTERN [+] include names matching the given patterns
    -X --exclude PATTERN [+] exclude names matching the given patterns
    -S --subrepos            recurse into subrepositories
    -T --template TEMPLATE   display with template
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
 
   $ hg -q help status
   hg status [OPTION]... [FILE]...
   
   show changed files in the working directory
 
   $ hg help foo
   abort: no such help topic: foo
   (try 'hg help --keyword foo')
   [255]
 
   $ hg skjdfks
   hg: unknown command 'skjdfks'
   (use 'hg help' for a list of commands)
   [255]
 
 Typoed command gives suggestion
   $ hg puls
   hg: unknown command 'puls'
   (did you mean one of pull, push?)
   [255]
 
 Not enabled extension gets suggested
 
   $ hg rebase
   hg: unknown command 'rebase'
   'rebase' is provided by the following extension:
   
       rebase        command to move sets of revisions to a different ancestor
   
   (use 'hg help extensions' for information on enabling extensions)
   [255]
 
 Disabled extension gets suggested
   $ hg --config extensions.rebase=! rebase
   hg: unknown command 'rebase'
   'rebase' is provided by the following extension:
   
       rebase        command to move sets of revisions to a different ancestor
   
   (use 'hg help extensions' for information on enabling extensions)
   [255]
 
 Make sure that we don't run afoul of the help system thinking that
 this is a section and erroring out weirdly.
 
   $ hg .log
   hg: unknown command '.log'
   (did you mean log?)
   [255]
 
   $ hg log.
   hg: unknown command 'log.'
   (did you mean log?)
   [255]
   $ hg pu.lh
   hg: unknown command 'pu.lh'
   (did you mean one of pull, push?)
   [255]
 
   $ cat > helpext.py <<EOF
   > import os
   > from mercurial import commands, fancyopts, registrar
   > 
   > def func(arg):
   >     return '%sfoo' % arg
   > class customopt(fancyopts.customopt):
   >     def newstate(self, oldstate, newparam, abort):
   >         return '%sbar' % oldstate
   > cmdtable = {}
   > command = registrar.command(cmdtable)
   > 
   > @command(b'nohelp',
   >     [(b'', b'longdesc', 3, b'x'*67),
   >     (b'n', b'', None, b'normal desc'),
   >     (b'', b'newline', b'', b'line1\nline2'),
   >     (b'', b'default-off', False, b'enable X'),
   >     (b'', b'default-on', True, b'enable Y'),
   >     (b'', b'callableopt', func, b'adds foo'),
   >     (b'', b'customopt', customopt(''), b'adds bar'),
   >     (b'', b'customopt-withdefault', customopt('foo'), b'adds bar')],
   >     b'hg nohelp',
   >     norepo=True)
   > @command(b'debugoptADV', [(b'', b'aopt', None, b'option is (ADVANCED)')])
   > @command(b'debugoptDEP', [(b'', b'dopt', None, b'option is (DEPRECATED)')])
   > @command(b'debugoptEXP', [(b'', b'eopt', None, b'option is (EXPERIMENTAL)')])
   > def nohelp(ui, *args, **kwargs):
   >     pass
   > 
   > @command(b'hashelp', [], b'hg hashelp', norepo=True)
   > def hashelp(ui, *args, **kwargs):
   >     """Extension command's help"""
   >     pass
   > 
   > def uisetup(ui):
   >     ui.setconfig(b'alias', b'shellalias', b'!echo hi', b'helpext')
   >     ui.setconfig(b'alias', b'hgalias', b'summary', b'helpext')
   >     ui.setconfig(b'alias', b'hgalias:doc', b'My doc', b'helpext')
   >     ui.setconfig(b'alias', b'hgalias:category', b'navigation', b'helpext')
   >     ui.setconfig(b'alias', b'hgaliasnodoc', b'summary', b'helpext')
   > 
   > EOF
   $ echo '[extensions]' >> $HGRCPATH
   $ echo "helpext = `pwd`/helpext.py" >> $HGRCPATH
 
 Test for aliases
 
   $ hg help | grep hgalias
    hgalias       My doc
 
   $ hg help hgalias
   hg hgalias [--remote]
   
   alias for: hg summary
   
   My doc
   
   defined by: helpext
   
   options:
   
     --remote check for push and pull
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
   $ hg help hgaliasnodoc
   hg hgaliasnodoc [--remote]
   
   alias for: hg summary
   
   summarize working directory state
   
       This generates a brief summary of the working directory state, including
       parents, branch, commit status, phase and available updates.
   
       With the --remote option, this will check the default paths for incoming
       and outgoing changes. This can be time-consuming.
   
       Returns 0 on success.
   
   defined by: helpext
   
   options:
   
     --remote check for push and pull
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
 
   $ hg help shellalias
   hg shellalias
   
   shell alias for: echo hi
   
   (no help text available)
   
   defined by: helpext
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
 
 Test command with no help text
 
   $ hg help nohelp
   hg nohelp
   
   (no help text available)
   
   options:
   
       --longdesc VALUE
                                     xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
                                     xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx (default: 3)
    -n --                            normal desc
       --newline VALUE               line1 line2
       --default-off                 enable X
       --[no-]default-on             enable Y (default: on)
       --callableopt VALUE           adds foo
       --customopt VALUE             adds bar
       --customopt-withdefault VALUE adds bar (default: foo)
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
 
 Test that default list of commands includes extension commands that have help,
 but not those that don't, except in verbose mode, when a keyword is passed, or
 when help about the extension is requested.
 
 #if no-extraextensions
 
   $ hg help | grep hashelp
    hashelp       Extension command's help
   $ hg help | grep nohelp
   [1]
   $ hg help -v | grep nohelp
    nohelp        (no help text available)
 
   $ hg help -k nohelp
   Commands:
   
    nohelp hg nohelp
   
   Extension Commands:
   
    nohelp (no help text available)
 
   $ hg help helpext
   helpext extension - no help text available
   
   list of commands:
   
    hashelp       Extension command's help
    nohelp        (no help text available)
   
   (use 'hg help -v helpext' to show built-in aliases and global options)
 
 #endif
 
 Test list of internal help commands
 
   $ hg help debug
   debug commands (internal and unsupported):
   
    debugancestor
                  find the ancestor revision of two revisions in a given index
    debugapplystreamclonebundle
                  apply a stream clone bundle file
    debugbuilddag
                  builds a repo with a given DAG from scratch in the current
                  empty repo
    debugbundle   lists the contents of a bundle
    debugcapabilities
                  lists the capabilities of a remote peer
    debugcheckstate
                  validate the correctness of the current dirstate
    debugcolor    show available color, effects or style
    debugcommands
                  list all available commands and options
    debugcomplete
                  returns the completion list associated with the given command
    debugcreatestreamclonebundle
                  create a stream clone bundle file
    debugdag      format the changelog or an index DAG as a concise textual
                  description
    debugdata     dump the contents of a data file revision
    debugdate     parse and display a date
    debugdeltachain
                  dump information about delta chains in a revlog
    debugdirstate
                  show the contents of the current dirstate
    debugdiscovery
                  runs the changeset discovery protocol in isolation
    debugdownload
                  download a resource using Mercurial logic and config
    debugextensions
                  show information about active extensions
    debugfileset  parse and apply a fileset specification
    debugformat   display format information about the current repository
    debugfsinfo   show information detected about current filesystem
    debuggetbundle
                  retrieves a bundle from a repo
    debugignore   display the combined ignore pattern and information about
                  ignored files
    debugindex    dump index data for a storage primitive
    debugindexdot
                  dump an index DAG as a graphviz dot file
    debugindexstats
                  show stats related to the changelog index
    debuginstall  test Mercurial installation
    debugknown    test whether node ids are known to a repo
    debuglocks    show or modify state of locks
    debugmanifestfulltextcache
                  show, clear or amend the contents of the manifest fulltext
                  cache
    debugmergestate
                  print merge state
    debugnamecomplete
                  complete "names" - tags, open branch names, bookmark names
    debugobsolete
                  create arbitrary obsolete marker
    debugoptADV   (no help text available)
    debugoptDEP   (no help text available)
    debugoptEXP   (no help text available)
    debugpathcomplete
                  complete part or all of a tracked path
    debugpeer     establish a connection to a peer repository
    debugpickmergetool
                  examine which merge tool is chosen for specified file
    debugpushkey  access the pushkey key/value protocol
    debugpvec     (no help text available)
    debugrebuilddirstate
                  rebuild the dirstate as it would look like for the given
                  revision
    debugrebuildfncache
                  rebuild the fncache file
    debugrename   dump rename information
    debugrevlog   show data and statistics about a revlog
    debugrevlogindex
                  dump the contents of a revlog index
    debugrevspec  parse and apply a revision specification
    debugserve    run a server with advanced settings
    debugsetparents
                  manually set the parents of the current working directory
    debugssl      test a secure connection to a server
    debugsub      (no help text available)
    debugsuccessorssets
                  show set of successors for revision
    debugtemplate
                  parse and apply a template
    debuguigetpass
                  show prompt to type password
    debuguiprompt
                  show plain prompt
    debugupdatecaches
                  warm all known caches in the repository
    debugupgraderepo
                  upgrade a repository to use different features
    debugwalk     show how files match on given patterns
    debugwhyunstable
                  explain instabilities of a changeset
    debugwireargs
                  (no help text available)
    debugwireproto
                  send wire protocol commands to a server
   
   (use 'hg help -v debug' to show built-in aliases and global options)
 
 internals topic renders index of available sub-topics
 
   $ hg help internals
   Technical implementation topics
   """""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
   
       To access a subtopic, use "hg help internals.{subtopic-name}"
   
        bundle2       Bundle2
        bundles       Bundles
        cbor          CBOR
        censor        Censor
        changegroups  Changegroups
        config        Config Registrar
        extensions    Extension API
        requirements  Repository Requirements
        revlogs       Revision Logs
        wireprotocol  Wire Protocol
        wireprotocolrpc
                      Wire Protocol RPC
        wireprotocolv2
                      Wire Protocol Version 2
 
 sub-topics can be accessed
 
   $ hg help internals.changegroups
   Changegroups
   """"""""""""
   
       Changegroups are representations of repository revlog data, specifically
       the changelog data, root/flat manifest data, treemanifest data, and
       filelogs.
   
       There are 3 versions of changegroups: "1", "2", and "3". From a high-
       level, versions "1" and "2" are almost exactly the same, with the only
       difference being an additional item in the *delta header*. Version "3"
       adds support for storage flags in the *delta header* and optionally
       exchanging treemanifests (enabled by setting an option on the
       "changegroup" part in the bundle2).
   
       Changegroups when not exchanging treemanifests consist of 3 logical
       segments:
   
         +---------------------------------+
         |           |          |          |
         | changeset | manifest | filelogs |
         |           |          |          |
         |           |          |          |
         +---------------------------------+
   
       When exchanging treemanifests, there are 4 logical segments:
   
         +-------------------------------------------------+
         |           |          |               |          |
         | changeset |   root   | treemanifests | filelogs |
         |           | manifest |               |          |
         |           |          |               |          |
         +-------------------------------------------------+
   
       The principle building block of each segment is a *chunk*. A *chunk* is a
       framed piece of data:
   
         +---------------------------------------+
         |           |                           |
         |  length   |           data            |
         | (4 bytes) |   (<length - 4> bytes)    |
         |           |                           |
         +---------------------------------------+
   
       All integers are big-endian signed integers. Each chunk starts with a
       32-bit integer indicating the length of the entire chunk (including the
       length field itself).
   
       There is a special case chunk that has a value of 0 for the length
       ("0x00000000"). We call this an *empty chunk*.
   
       Delta Groups
       ============
   
       A *delta group* expresses the content of a revlog as a series of deltas,
       or patches against previous revisions.
   
       Delta groups consist of 0 or more *chunks* followed by the *empty chunk*
       to signal the end of the delta group:
   
         +------------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |                |             |               |             |           |
         | chunk0 length  | chunk0 data | chunk1 length | chunk1 data |    0x0    |
         |   (4 bytes)    |  (various)  |   (4 bytes)   |  (various)  | (4 bytes) |
         |                |             |               |             |           |
         +------------------------------------------------------------------------+
   
       Each *chunk*'s data consists of the following:
   
         +---------------------------------------+
         |                        |              |
         |     delta header       |  delta data  |
         |  (various by version)  |  (various)   |
         |                        |              |
         +---------------------------------------+
   
       The *delta data* is a series of *delta*s that describe a diff from an
       existing entry (either that the recipient already has, or previously
       specified in the bundle/changegroup).
   
       The *delta header* is different between versions "1", "2", and "3" of the
       changegroup format.
   
       Version 1 (headerlen=80):
   
         +------------------------------------------------------+
         |            |             |             |             |
         |    node    |   p1 node   |   p2 node   |  link node  |
         | (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) |
         |            |             |             |             |
         +------------------------------------------------------+
   
       Version 2 (headerlen=100):
   
         +------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |            |             |             |            |            |
         |    node    |   p1 node   |   p2 node   | base node  | link node  |
         | (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) | (20 bytes) | (20 bytes) |
         |            |             |             |            |            |
         +------------------------------------------------------------------+
   
       Version 3 (headerlen=102):
   
         +------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |            |             |             |            |            |           |
         |    node    |   p1 node   |   p2 node   | base node  | link node  |   flags   |
         | (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) | (20 bytes) | (20 bytes) | (2 bytes) |
         |            |             |             |            |            |           |
         +------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
   
       The *delta data* consists of "chunklen - 4 - headerlen" bytes, which
       contain a series of *delta*s, densely packed (no separators). These deltas
       describe a diff from an existing entry (either that the recipient already
       has, or previously specified in the bundle/changegroup). The format is
       described more fully in "hg help internals.bdiff", but briefly:
   
         +---------------------------------------------------------------+
         |              |            |            |                      |
         | start offset | end offset | new length |        content       |
         |  (4 bytes)   |  (4 bytes) |  (4 bytes) | (<new length> bytes) |
         |              |            |            |                      |
         +---------------------------------------------------------------+
   
       Please note that the length field in the delta data does *not* include
       itself.
   
       In version 1, the delta is always applied against the previous node from
       the changegroup or the first parent if this is the first entry in the
       changegroup.
   
       In version 2 and up, the delta base node is encoded in the entry in the
       changegroup. This allows the delta to be expressed against any parent,
       which can result in smaller deltas and more efficient encoding of data.
   
       The *flags* field holds bitwise flags affecting the processing of revision
       data. The following flags are defined:
   
       32768
          Censored revision. The revision's fulltext has been replaced by censor
          metadata. May only occur on file revisions.
   
       16384
          Ellipsis revision. Revision hash does not match data (likely due to
          rewritten parents).
   
       8192
          Externally stored. The revision fulltext contains "key:value" "\n"
          delimited metadata defining an object stored elsewhere. Used by the LFS
          extension.
   
       For historical reasons, the integer values are identical to revlog version
       1 per-revision storage flags and correspond to bits being set in this
       2-byte field. Bits were allocated starting from the most-significant bit,
       hence the reverse ordering and allocation of these flags.
   
       Changeset Segment
       =================
   
       The *changeset segment* consists of a single *delta group* holding
       changelog data. The *empty chunk* at the end of the *delta group* denotes
       the boundary to the *manifest segment*.
   
       Manifest Segment
       ================
   
       The *manifest segment* consists of a single *delta group* holding manifest
       data. If treemanifests are in use, it contains only the manifest for the
       root directory of the repository. Otherwise, it contains the entire
       manifest data. The *empty chunk* at the end of the *delta group* denotes
       the boundary to the next segment (either the *treemanifests segment* or
       the *filelogs segment*, depending on version and the request options).
   
       Treemanifests Segment
       ---------------------
   
       The *treemanifests segment* only exists in changegroup version "3", and
       only if the 'treemanifest' param is part of the bundle2 changegroup part
       (it is not possible to use changegroup version 3 outside of bundle2).
       Aside from the filenames in the *treemanifests segment* containing a
       trailing "/" character, it behaves identically to the *filelogs segment*
       (see below). The final sub-segment is followed by an *empty chunk*
       (logically, a sub-segment with filename size 0). This denotes the boundary
       to the *filelogs segment*.
   
       Filelogs Segment
       ================
   
       The *filelogs segment* consists of multiple sub-segments, each
       corresponding to an individual file whose data is being described:
   
         +--------------------------------------------------+
         |          |          |          |     |           |
         | filelog0 | filelog1 | filelog2 | ... |    0x0    |
         |          |          |          |     | (4 bytes) |
         |          |          |          |     |           |
         +--------------------------------------------------+
   
       The final filelog sub-segment is followed by an *empty chunk* (logically,
       a sub-segment with filename size 0). This denotes the end of the segment
       and of the overall changegroup.
   
       Each filelog sub-segment consists of the following:
   
         +------------------------------------------------------+
         |                 |                      |             |
         | filename length |       filename       | delta group |
         |    (4 bytes)    | (<length - 4> bytes) |  (various)  |
         |                 |                      |             |
         +------------------------------------------------------+
   
       That is, a *chunk* consisting of the filename (not terminated or padded)
       followed by N chunks constituting the *delta group* for this file. The
       *empty chunk* at the end of each *delta group* denotes the boundary to the
       next filelog sub-segment.
 
 test advanced, deprecated and experimental options are hidden in command help
   $ hg help debugoptADV
   hg debugoptADV
   
   (no help text available)
   
   options:
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
   $ hg help debugoptDEP
   hg debugoptDEP
   
   (no help text available)
   
   options:
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
 
   $ hg help debugoptEXP
   hg debugoptEXP
   
   (no help text available)
   
   options:
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
 
 test advanced, deprecated and experimental options are shown with -v
   $ hg help -v debugoptADV | grep aopt
     --aopt option is (ADVANCED)
   $ hg help -v debugoptDEP | grep dopt
     --dopt option is (DEPRECATED)
   $ hg help -v debugoptEXP | grep eopt
     --eopt option is (EXPERIMENTAL)
 
 #if gettext
 test deprecated option is hidden with translation with untranslated description
 (use many globy for not failing on changed transaction)
   $ LANGUAGE=sv hg help debugoptDEP
   hg debugoptDEP
   
   (*) (glob)
   
   options:
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
 #endif
 
 Test commands that collide with topics (issue4240)
 
   $ hg config -hq
   hg config [-u] [NAME]...
   
   show combined config settings from all hgrc files
   $ hg showconfig -hq
   hg config [-u] [NAME]...
   
   show combined config settings from all hgrc files
 
 Test a help topic
 
   $ hg help dates
   Date Formats
   """"""""""""
   
       Some commands allow the user to specify a date, e.g.:
   
       - backout, commit, import, tag: Specify the commit date.
       - log, revert, update: Select revision(s) by date.
   
       Many date formats are valid. Here are some examples:
   
       - "Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006" (local timezone assumed)
       - "Dec 6 13:18 -0600" (year assumed, time offset provided)
       - "Dec 6 13:18 UTC" (UTC and GMT are aliases for +0000)
       - "Dec 6" (midnight)
       - "13:18" (today assumed)
       - "3:39" (3:39AM assumed)
       - "3:39pm" (15:39)
       - "2006-12-06 13:18:29" (ISO 8601 format)
       - "2006-12-6 13:18"
       - "2006-12-6"
       - "12-6"
       - "12/6"
       - "12/6/6" (Dec 6 2006)
       - "today" (midnight)
       - "yesterday" (midnight)
       - "now" - right now
   
       Lastly, there is Mercurial's internal format:
   
       - "1165411109 0" (Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006 UTC)
   
       This is the internal representation format for dates. The first number is
       the number of seconds since the epoch (1970-01-01 00:00 UTC). The second
       is the offset of the local timezone, in seconds west of UTC (negative if
       the timezone is east of UTC).
   
       The log command also accepts date ranges:
   
       - "<DATE" - at or before a given date/time
       - ">DATE" - on or after a given date/time
       - "DATE to DATE" - a date range, inclusive
       - "-DAYS" - within a given number of days of today
 
 Test repeated config section name
 
   $ hg help config.host
       "http_proxy.host"
           Host name and (optional) port of the proxy server, for example
           "myproxy:8000".
   
       "smtp.host"
           Host name of mail server, e.g. "mail.example.com".
   
 
 Test section name with dot
 
   $ hg help config.ui.username
       "ui.username"
           The committer of a changeset created when running "commit". Typically
           a person's name and email address, e.g. "Fred Widget
           <[e-mail]>". Environment variables in the username are
           expanded.
   
           (default: "$EMAIL" or "username@hostname". If the username in hgrc is
           empty, e.g. if the system admin set "username =" in the system hgrc,
           it has to be specified manually or in a different hgrc file)
   
 
   $ hg help config.annotate.git
   abort: help section not found: config.annotate.git
   [255]
 
   $ hg help config.update.check
       "commands.update.check"
           Determines what level of checking 'hg update' will perform before
           moving to a destination revision. Valid values are "abort", "none",
           "linear", and "noconflict". "abort" always fails if the working
           directory has uncommitted changes. "none" performs no checking, and
           may result in a merge with uncommitted changes. "linear" allows any
           update as long as it follows a straight line in the revision history,
           and may trigger a merge with uncommitted changes. "noconflict" will
           allow any update which would not trigger a merge with uncommitted
           changes, if any are present. (default: "linear")
   
 
   $ hg help config.commands.update.check
       "commands.update.check"
           Determines what level of checking 'hg update' will perform before
           moving to a destination revision. Valid values are "abort", "none",
           "linear", and "noconflict". "abort" always fails if the working
           directory has uncommitted changes. "none" performs no checking, and
           may result in a merge with uncommitted changes. "linear" allows any
           update as long as it follows a straight line in the revision history,
           and may trigger a merge with uncommitted changes. "noconflict" will
           allow any update which would not trigger a merge with uncommitted
           changes, if any are present. (default: "linear")
   
 
   $ hg help config.ommands.update.check
   abort: help section not found: config.ommands.update.check
   [255]
 
 Unrelated trailing paragraphs shouldn't be included
 
   $ hg help config.extramsg | grep '^$'
   
 
 Test capitalized section name
 
   $ hg help scripting.HGPLAIN > /dev/null
 
 Help subsection:
 
   $ hg help config.charsets |grep "Email example:" > /dev/null
   [1]
 
 Show nested definitions
 ("profiling.type"[break]"ls"[break]"stat"[break])
 
   $ hg help config.type | egrep '^$'|wc -l
   \s*3 (re)
 
   $ hg help config.profiling.type.ls
           "profiling.type.ls"
             Use Python's built-in instrumenting profiler. This profiler works on
             all platforms, but each line number it reports is the first line of
             a function. This restriction makes it difficult to identify the
             expensive parts of a non-trivial function.
   
 
 Separate sections from subsections
 
   $ hg help config.format | egrep '^    ("|-)|^\s*$' | uniq
       "format"
       --------
   
       "usegeneraldelta"
   
       "dotencode"
   
       "usefncache"
   
       "usestore"
   
+      "sparse-revlog"
+  
       "profiling"
       -----------
   
       "format"
   
       "progress"
       ----------
   
       "format"
   
 
 Last item in help config.*:
 
   $ hg help config.`hg help config|grep '^    "'| \
   >       tail -1|sed 's![ "]*!!g'`| \
   >   grep 'hg help -c config' > /dev/null
   [1]
 
 note to use help -c for general hg help config:
 
   $ hg help config |grep 'hg help -c config' > /dev/null
 
 Test templating help
 
   $ hg help templating | egrep '(desc|diffstat|firstline|nonempty)  '
       desc          String. The text of the changeset description.
       diffstat      String. Statistics of changes with the following format:
       firstline     Any text. Returns the first line of text.
       nonempty      Any text. Returns '(none)' if the string is empty.
 
 Test deprecated items
 
   $ hg help -v templating | grep currentbookmark
       currentbookmark
   $ hg help templating | (grep currentbookmark || true)
 
 Test help hooks
 
   $ cat > helphook1.py <<EOF
   > from mercurial import help
   > 
   > def rewrite(ui, topic, doc):
   >     return doc + b'\nhelphook1\n'
   > 
   > def extsetup(ui):
   >     help.addtopichook(b'revisions', rewrite)
   > EOF
   $ cat > helphook2.py <<EOF
   > from mercurial import help
   > 
   > def rewrite(ui, topic, doc):
   >     return doc + b'\nhelphook2\n'
   > 
   > def extsetup(ui):
   >     help.addtopichook(b'revisions', rewrite)
   > EOF
   $ echo '[extensions]' >> $HGRCPATH
   $ echo "helphook1 = `pwd`/helphook1.py" >> $HGRCPATH
   $ echo "helphook2 = `pwd`/helphook2.py" >> $HGRCPATH
   $ hg help revsets | grep helphook
       helphook1
       helphook2
 
 help -c should only show debug --debug
 
   $ hg help -c --debug|egrep debug|wc -l|egrep '^\s*0\s*$'
   [1]
 
 help -c should only show deprecated for -v
 
   $ hg help -c -v|egrep DEPRECATED|wc -l|egrep '^\s*0\s*$'
   [1]
 
 Test -s / --system
 
   $ hg help config.files -s windows |grep 'etc/mercurial' | \
   > wc -l | sed -e 's/ //g'
   0
   $ hg help config.files --system unix | grep 'USER' | \
   > wc -l | sed -e 's/ //g'
   0
 
 Test -e / -c / -k combinations
 
   $ hg help -c|egrep '^[A-Z].*:|^ debug'
   Commands:
   $ hg help -e|egrep '^[A-Z].*:|^ debug'
   Extensions:
   $ hg help -k|egrep '^[A-Z].*:|^ debug'
   Topics:
   Commands:
   Extensions:
   Extension Commands:
   $ hg help -c schemes
   abort: no such help topic: schemes
   (try 'hg help --keyword schemes')
   [255]
   $ hg help -e schemes |head -1
   schemes extension - extend schemes with shortcuts to repository swarms
   $ hg help -c -k dates |egrep '^(Topics|Extensions|Commands):'
   Commands:
   $ hg help -e -k a |egrep '^(Topics|Extensions|Commands):'
   Extensions:
   $ hg help -e -c -k date |egrep '^(Topics|Extensions|Commands):'
   Extensions:
   Commands:
   $ hg help -c commit > /dev/null
   $ hg help -e -c commit > /dev/null
   $ hg help -e commit
   abort: no such help topic: commit
   (try 'hg help --keyword commit')
   [255]
 
 Test keyword search help
 
   $ cat > prefixedname.py <<EOF
   > '''matched against word "clone"
   > '''
   > EOF
   $ echo '[extensions]' >> $HGRCPATH
   $ echo "dot.dot.prefixedname = `pwd`/prefixedname.py" >> $HGRCPATH
   $ hg help -k clone
   Topics:
   
    config     Configuration Files
    extensions Using Additional Features
    glossary   Glossary
    phases     Working with Phases
    subrepos   Subrepositories
    urls       URL Paths
   
   Commands:
   
    bookmarks create a new bookmark or list existing bookmarks
    clone     make a copy of an existing repository
    paths     show aliases for remote repositories
    pull      pull changes from the specified source
    update    update working directory (or switch revisions)
   
   Extensions:
   
    clonebundles advertise pre-generated bundles to seed clones
    narrow       create clones which fetch history data for subset of files
                 (EXPERIMENTAL)
    prefixedname matched against word "clone"
    relink       recreates hardlinks between repository clones
   
   Extension Commands:
   
    qclone clone main and patch repository at same time
 
 Test unfound topic
 
   $ hg help nonexistingtopicthatwillneverexisteverever
   abort: no such help topic: nonexistingtopicthatwillneverexisteverever
   (try 'hg help --keyword nonexistingtopicthatwillneverexisteverever')
   [255]
 
 Test unfound keyword
 
   $ hg help --keyword nonexistingwordthatwillneverexisteverever
   abort: no matches
   (try 'hg help' for a list of topics)
   [255]
 
 Test omit indicating for help
 
   $ cat > addverboseitems.py <<EOF
   > '''extension to test omit indicating.
   > 
   > This paragraph is never omitted (for extension)
   > 
   > .. container:: verbose
   > 
   >   This paragraph is omitted,
   >   if :hg:\`help\` is invoked without \`\`-v\`\` (for extension)
   > 
   > This paragraph is never omitted, too (for extension)
   > '''
   > from __future__ import absolute_import
   > from mercurial import commands, help
   > testtopic = b"""This paragraph is never omitted (for topic).
   > 
   > .. container:: verbose
   > 
   >   This paragraph is omitted,
   >   if :hg:\`help\` is invoked without \`\`-v\`\` (for topic)
   > 
   > This paragraph is never omitted, too (for topic)
   > """
   > def extsetup(ui):
   >     help.helptable.append(([b"topic-containing-verbose"],
   >                            b"This is the topic to test omit indicating.",
   >                            lambda ui: testtopic))
   > EOF
   $ echo '[extensions]' >> $HGRCPATH
   $ echo "addverboseitems = `pwd`/addverboseitems.py" >> $HGRCPATH
   $ hg help addverboseitems
   addverboseitems extension - extension to test omit indicating.
   
   This paragraph is never omitted (for extension)
   
   This paragraph is never omitted, too (for extension)
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
   
   no commands defined
   $ hg help -v addverboseitems
   addverboseitems extension - extension to test omit indicating.
   
   This paragraph is never omitted (for extension)
   
   This paragraph is omitted, if 'hg help' is invoked without "-v" (for
   extension)
   
   This paragraph is never omitted, too (for extension)
   
   no commands defined
   $ hg help topic-containing-verbose
   This is the topic to test omit indicating.
   """"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
   
       This paragraph is never omitted (for topic).
   
       This paragraph is never omitted, too (for topic)
   
   (some details hidden, use --verbose to show complete help)
   $ hg help -v topic-containing-verbose
   This is the topic to test omit indicating.
   """"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
   
       This paragraph is never omitted (for topic).
   
       This paragraph is omitted, if 'hg help' is invoked without "-v" (for
       topic)
   
       This paragraph is never omitted, too (for topic)
 
 Test section lookup
 
   $ hg help revset.merge
       "merge()"
         Changeset is a merge changeset.
   
   $ hg help glossary.dag
       DAG
           The repository of changesets of a distributed version control system
           (DVCS) can be described as a directed acyclic graph (DAG), consisting
           of nodes and edges, where nodes correspond to changesets and edges
           imply a parent -> child relation. This graph can be visualized by
           graphical tools such as 'hg log --graph'. In Mercurial, the DAG is
           limited by the requirement for children to have at most two parents.
   
 
   $ hg help hgrc.paths
       "paths"
       -------
   
       Assigns symbolic names and behavior to repositories.
   
       Options are symbolic names defining the URL or directory that is the
       location of the repository. Example:
   
         [paths]
         my_server = https://example.com/my_repo
         local_path = /home/me/repo
   
       These symbolic names can be used from the command line. To pull from
       "my_server": 'hg pull my_server'. To push to "local_path": 'hg push
       local_path'.
   
       Options containing colons (":") denote sub-options that can influence
       behavior for that specific path. Example:
   
         [paths]
         my_server = https://example.com/my_path
         my_server:pushurl = ssh://example.com/my_path
   
       The following sub-options can be defined:
   
       "pushurl"
          The URL to use for push operations. If not defined, the location
          defined by the path's main entry is used.
   
       "pushrev"
          A revset defining which revisions to push by default.
   
          When 'hg push' is executed without a "-r" argument, the revset defined
          by this sub-option is evaluated to determine what to push.
   
          For example, a value of "." will push the working directory's revision
          by default.
   
          Revsets specifying bookmarks will not result in the bookmark being
          pushed.
   
       The following special named paths exist:
   
       "default"
          The URL or directory to use when no source or remote is specified.
   
          'hg clone' will automatically define this path to the location the
          repository was cloned from.
   
       "default-push"
          (deprecated) The URL or directory for the default 'hg push' location.
          "default:pushurl" should be used instead.
   
   $ hg help glossary.mcguffin
   abort: help section not found: glossary.mcguffin
   [255]
 
   $ hg help glossary.mc.guffin
   abort: help section not found: glossary.mc.guffin
   [255]
 
   $ hg help template.files
       files         List of strings. All files modified, added, or removed by
                     this changeset.
       files(pattern)
                     All files of the current changeset matching the pattern. See
                     'hg help patterns'.
 
 Test section lookup by translated message
 
 str.lower() instead of encoding.lower(str) on translated message might
 make message meaningless, because some encoding uses 0x41(A) - 0x5a(Z)
 as the second or later byte of multi-byte character.
 
 For example, "\x8bL\x98^" (translation of "record" in ja_JP.cp932)
 contains 0x4c (L). str.lower() replaces 0x4c(L) by 0x6c(l) and this
 replacement makes message meaningless.
 
 This tests that section lookup by translated string isn't broken by
 such str.lower().
 
   $ "$PYTHON" <<EOF
   > def escape(s):
   >     return b''.join(b'\\u%x' % ord(uc) for uc in s.decode('cp932'))
   > # translation of "record" in ja_JP.cp932
   > upper = b"\x8bL\x98^"
   > # str.lower()-ed section name should be treated as different one
   > lower = b"\x8bl\x98^"
   > with open('ambiguous.py', 'wb') as fp:
   >     fp.write(b"""# ambiguous section names in ja_JP.cp932
   > u'''summary of extension
   > 
   > %s
   > ----
   > 
   > Upper name should show only this message
   > 
   > %s
   > ----
   > 
   > Lower name should show only this message
   > 
   > subsequent section
   > ------------------
   > 
   > This should be hidden at 'hg help ambiguous' with section name.
   > '''
   > """ % (escape(upper), escape(lower)))
   > EOF
 
   $ cat >> $HGRCPATH <<EOF
   > [extensions]
   > ambiguous = ./ambiguous.py
   > EOF
 
   $ "$PYTHON" <<EOF | sh
   > from mercurial import pycompat
   > upper = b"\x8bL\x98^"
   > pycompat.stdout.write(b"hg --encoding cp932 help -e ambiguous.%s\n" % upper)
   > EOF
   \x8bL\x98^ (esc)
   ----
   
   Upper name should show only this message
   
 
   $ "$PYTHON" <<EOF | sh
   > from mercurial import pycompat
   > lower = b"\x8bl\x98^"
   > pycompat.stdout.write(b"hg --encoding cp932 help -e ambiguous.%s\n" % lower)
   > EOF
   \x8bl\x98^ (esc)
   ----
   
   Lower name should show only this message
   
 
   $ cat >> $HGRCPATH <<EOF
   > [extensions]
   > ambiguous = !
   > EOF
 
 Show help content of disabled extensions
 
   $ cat >> $HGRCPATH <<EOF
   > [extensions]
   > ambiguous = !./ambiguous.py
   > EOF
   $ hg help -e ambiguous
   ambiguous extension - (no help text available)
   
   (use 'hg help extensions' for information on enabling extensions)
 
 Test dynamic list of merge tools only shows up once
   $ hg help merge-tools
   Merge Tools
   """""""""""
   
       To merge files Mercurial uses merge tools.
   
       A merge tool combines two different versions of a file into a merged file.
       Merge tools are given the two files and the greatest common ancestor of
       the two file versions, so they can determine the changes made on both
       branches.
   
       Merge tools are used both for 'hg resolve', 'hg merge', 'hg update', 'hg
       backout' and in several extensions.
   
       Usually, the merge tool tries to automatically reconcile the files by
       combining all non-overlapping changes that occurred separately in the two
       different evolutions of the same initial base file. Furthermore, some
       interactive merge programs make it easier to manually resolve conflicting
       merges, either in a graphical way, or by inserting some conflict markers.
       Mercurial does not include any interactive merge programs but relies on
       external tools for that.
   
       Available merge tools
       =====================
   
       External merge tools and their properties are configured in the merge-
       tools configuration section - see hgrc(5) - but they can often just be
       named by their executable.
   
       A merge tool is generally usable if its executable can be found on the
       system and if it can handle the merge. The executable is found if it is an
       absolute or relative executable path or the name of an application in the
       executable search path. The tool is assumed to be able to handle the merge
       if it can handle symlinks if the file is a symlink, if it can handle
       binary files if the file is binary, and if a GUI is available if the tool
       requires a GUI.
   
       There are some internal merge tools which can be used. The internal merge
       tools are:
   
       ":dump"
         Creates three versions of the files to merge, containing the contents of
         local, other and base. These files can then be used to perform a merge
         manually. If the file to be merged is named "a.txt", these files will
         accordingly be named "a.txt.local", "a.txt.other" and "a.txt.base" and
         they will be placed in the same directory as "a.txt".
   
         This implies premerge. Therefore, files aren't dumped, if premerge runs
         successfully. Use :forcedump to forcibly write files out.
   
         (actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
   
       ":fail"
         Rather than attempting to merge files that were modified on both
         branches, it marks them as unresolved. The resolve command must be used
         to resolve these conflicts.
   
         (actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
   
       ":forcedump"
         Creates three versions of the files as same as :dump, but omits
         premerge.
   
         (actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
   
       ":local"
         Uses the local 'p1()' version of files as the merged version.
   
         (actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
   
       ":merge"
         Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for merging
         files. It will fail if there are any conflicts and leave markers in the
         partially merged file. Markers will have two sections, one for each side
         of merge.
   
       ":merge-local"
         Like :merge, but resolve all conflicts non-interactively in favor of the
         local 'p1()' changes.
   
       ":merge-other"
         Like :merge, but resolve all conflicts non-interactively in favor of the
         other 'p2()' changes.
   
       ":merge3"
         Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for merging
         files. It will fail if there are any conflicts and leave markers in the
         partially merged file. Marker will have three sections, one from each
         side of the merge and one for the base content.
   
       ":other"
         Uses the other 'p2()' version of files as the merged version.
   
         (actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
   
       ":prompt"
         Asks the user which of the local 'p1()' or the other 'p2()' version to
         keep as the merged version.
   
         (actual capabilities: binary, symlink)
   
       ":tagmerge"
         Uses the internal tag merge algorithm (experimental).
   
       ":union"
         Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for merging
         files. It will use both left and right sides for conflict regions. No
         markers are inserted.
   
       Internal tools are always available and do not require a GUI but will by
       default not handle symlinks or binary files. See next section for detail
       about "actual capabilities" described above.
   
       Choosing a merge tool
       =====================
   
       Mercurial uses these rules when deciding which merge tool to use:
   
       1. If a tool has been specified with the --tool option to merge or
          resolve, it is used.  If it is the name of a tool in the merge-tools
          configuration, its configuration is used. Otherwise the specified tool
          must be executable by the shell.
       2. If the "HGMERGE" environment variable is present, its value is used and
          must be executable by the shell.
       3. If the filename of the file to be merged matches any of the patterns in
          the merge-patterns configuration section, the first usable merge tool
          corresponding to a matching pattern is used.
       4. If ui.merge is set it will be considered next. If the value is not the
          name of a configured tool, the specified value is used and must be
          executable by the shell. Otherwise the named tool is used if it is
          usable.
       5. If any usable merge tools are present in the merge-tools configuration
          section, the one with the highest priority is used.
       6. If a program named "hgmerge" can be found on the system, it is used -
          but it will by default not be used for symlinks and binary files.
       7. If the file to be merged is not binary and is not a symlink, then
          internal ":merge" is used.
       8. Otherwise, ":prompt" is used.
   
       For historical reason, Mercurial treats merge tools as below while
       examining rules above.
   
       step specified via  binary symlink
       ----------------------------------
       1.   --tool         o/o    o/o
       2.   HGMERGE        o/o    o/o
       3.   merge-patterns o/o(*) x/?(*)
       4.   ui.merge       x/?(*) x/?(*)
   
       Each capability column indicates Mercurial behavior for internal/external
       merge tools at examining each rule.
   
       - "o": "assume that a tool has capability"
       - "x": "assume that a tool does not have capability"
       - "?": "check actual capability of a tool"
   
       If "merge.strict-capability-check" configuration is true, Mercurial checks
       capabilities of merge tools strictly in (*) cases above (= each capability
       column becomes "?/?"). It is false by default for backward compatibility.
   
       Note:
          After selecting a merge program, Mercurial will by default attempt to
          merge the files using a simple merge algorithm first. Only if it
          doesn't succeed because of conflicting changes will Mercurial actually
          execute the merge program. Whether to use the simple merge algorithm
          first can be controlled by the premerge setting of the merge tool.
          Premerge is enabled by default unless the file is binary or a symlink.
   
       See the merge-tools and ui sections of hgrc(5) for details on the
       configuration of merge tools.
 
 Compression engines listed in `hg help bundlespec`
 
   $ hg help bundlespec | grep gzip
           "v1" bundles can only use the "gzip", "bzip2", and "none" compression
         An algorithm that produces smaller bundles than "gzip".
         This engine will likely produce smaller bundles than "gzip" but will be
       "gzip"
         better compression than "gzip". It also frequently yields better (?)
 
 Test usage of section marks in help documents
 
   $ cd "$TESTDIR"/../doc
   $ "$PYTHON" check-seclevel.py
   $ cd $TESTTMP
 
 #if serve
 
 Test the help pages in hgweb.
 
 Dish up an empty repo; serve it cold.
 
   $ hg init "$TESTTMP/test"
   $ hg serve -R "$TESTTMP/test" -n test -p $HGPORT -d --pid-file=hg.pid
   $ cat hg.pid >> $DAEMON_PIDS
 
   $ get-with-headers.py $LOCALIP:$HGPORT "help"
   200 Script output follows
   
   <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd">
   <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en-US">
   <head>
   <link rel="icon" href="/static/hgicon.png" type="image/png" />
   <meta name="robots" content="index, nofollow" />
   <link rel="stylesheet" href="/static/style-paper.css" type="text/css" />
   <script type="text/javascript" src="/static/mercurial.js"></script>
   
   <title>Help: Index</title>
   </head>
   <body>
   
   <div class="container">
   <div class="menu">
   <div class="logo">
   <a href="https://mercurial-scm.org/">
   <img src="/static/hglogo.png" alt="mercurial" /></a>
   </div>
   <ul>
   <li><a href="/shortlog">log</a></li>
   <li><a href="/graph">graph</a></li>
   <li><a href="/tags">tags</a></li>
   <li><a href="/bookmarks">bookmarks</a></li>
   <li><a href="/branches">branches</a></li>
   </ul>
   <ul>
   <li class="active">help</li>
   </ul>
   </div>
   
   <div class="main">
   <h2 class="breadcrumb"><a href="/">Mercurial</a> </h2>
   
   <form class="search" action="/log">
   
   <p><input name="rev" id="search1" type="text" size="30" value="" /></p>
   <div id="hint">Find changesets by keywords (author, files, the commit message), revision
   number or hash, or <a href="/help/revsets">revset expression</a>.</div>
   </form>
   <table class="bigtable">
   <tr><td colspan="2"><h2><a name="topics" href="#topics">Topics</a></h2></td></tr>
   
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/bundlespec">
   bundlespec
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Bundle File Formats
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/color">
   color
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Colorizing Outputs
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/config">
   config
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Configuration Files
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/dates">
   dates
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Date Formats
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/deprecated">
   deprecated
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Deprecated Features
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/diffs">
   diffs
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Diff Formats
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/environment">
   environment
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Environment Variables
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/extensions">
   extensions
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Using Additional Features
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/filesets">
   filesets
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Specifying File Sets
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/flags">
   flags
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Command-line flags
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/glossary">
   glossary
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Glossary
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/hgignore">
   hgignore
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Syntax for Mercurial Ignore Files
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/hgweb">
   hgweb
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Configuring hgweb
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/internals">
   internals
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Technical implementation topics
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/merge-tools">
   merge-tools
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Merge Tools
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/pager">
   pager
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Pager Support
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/patterns">
   patterns
   </a>
   </td><td>
   File Name Patterns
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/phases">
   phases
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Working with Phases
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/revisions">
   revisions
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Specifying Revisions
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/scripting">
   scripting
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Using Mercurial from scripts and automation
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/subrepos">
   subrepos
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Subrepositories
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/templating">
   templating
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Template Usage
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/urls">
   urls
   </a>
   </td><td>
   URL Paths
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/topic-containing-verbose">
   topic-containing-verbose
   </a>
   </td><td>
   This is the topic to test omit indicating.
   </td></tr>
   
   
   <tr><td colspan="2"><h2><a name="main" href="#main">Main Commands</a></h2></td></tr>
   
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/add">
   add
   </a>
   </td><td>
   add the specified files on the next commit
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/annotate">
   annotate
   </a>
   </td><td>
   show changeset information by line for each file
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/clone">
   clone
   </a>
   </td><td>
   make a copy of an existing repository
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/commit">
   commit
   </a>
   </td><td>
   commit the specified files or all outstanding changes
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/diff">
   diff
   </a>
   </td><td>
   diff repository (or selected files)
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/export">
   export
   </a>
   </td><td>
   dump the header and diffs for one or more changesets
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/forget">
   forget
   </a>
   </td><td>
   forget the specified files on the next commit
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/init">
   init
   </a>
   </td><td>
   create a new repository in the given directory
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/log">
   log
   </a>
   </td><td>
   show revision history of entire repository or files
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/merge">
   merge
   </a>
   </td><td>
   merge another revision into working directory
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/pull">
   pull
   </a>
   </td><td>
   pull changes from the specified source
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/push">
   push
   </a>
   </td><td>
   push changes to the specified destination
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/remove">
   remove
   </a>
   </td><td>
   remove the specified files on the next commit
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/serve">
   serve
   </a>
   </td><td>
   start stand-alone webserver
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/status">
   status
   </a>
   </td><td>
   show changed files in the working directory
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/summary">
   summary
   </a>
   </td><td>
   summarize working directory state
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/update">
   update
   </a>
   </td><td>
   update working directory (or switch revisions)
   </td></tr>
   
   
   
   <tr><td colspan="2"><h2><a name="other" href="#other">Other Commands</a></h2></td></tr>
   
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/addremove">
   addremove
   </a>
   </td><td>
   add all new files, delete all missing files
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/archive">
   archive
   </a>
   </td><td>
   create an unversioned archive of a repository revision
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/backout">
   backout
   </a>
   </td><td>
   reverse effect of earlier changeset
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/bisect">
   bisect
   </a>
   </td><td>
   subdivision search of changesets
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/bookmarks">
   bookmarks
   </a>
   </td><td>
   create a new bookmark or list existing bookmarks
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/branch">
   branch
   </a>
   </td><td>
   set or show the current branch name
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/branches">
   branches
   </a>
   </td><td>
   list repository named branches
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/bundle">
   bundle
   </a>
   </td><td>
   create a bundle file
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/cat">
   cat
   </a>
   </td><td>
   output the current or given revision of files
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/config">
   config
   </a>
   </td><td>
   show combined config settings from all hgrc files
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/copy">
   copy
   </a>
   </td><td>
   mark files as copied for the next commit
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/files">
   files
   </a>
   </td><td>
   list tracked files
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/graft">
   graft
   </a>
   </td><td>
   copy changes from other branches onto the current branch
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/grep">
   grep
   </a>
   </td><td>
   search revision history for a pattern in specified files
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/hashelp">
   hashelp
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Extension command's help
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/heads">
   heads
   </a>
   </td><td>
   show branch heads
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/help">
   help
   </a>
   </td><td>
   show help for a given topic or a help overview
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/hgalias">
   hgalias
   </a>
   </td><td>
   My doc
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/hgaliasnodoc">
   hgaliasnodoc
   </a>
   </td><td>
   summarize working directory state
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/identify">
   identify
   </a>
   </td><td>
   identify the working directory or specified revision
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/import">
   import
   </a>
   </td><td>
   import an ordered set of patches
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/incoming">
   incoming
   </a>
   </td><td>
   show new changesets found in source
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/manifest">
   manifest
   </a>
   </td><td>
   output the current or given revision of the project manifest
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/nohelp">
   nohelp
   </a>
   </td><td>
   (no help text available)
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/outgoing">
   outgoing
   </a>
   </td><td>
   show changesets not found in the destination
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/paths">
   paths
   </a>
   </td><td>
   show aliases for remote repositories
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/phase">
   phase
   </a>
   </td><td>
   set or show the current phase name
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/recover">
   recover
   </a>
   </td><td>
   roll back an interrupted transaction
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/rename">
   rename
   </a>
   </td><td>
   rename files; equivalent of copy + remove
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/resolve">
   resolve
   </a>
   </td><td>
   redo merges or set/view the merge status of files
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/revert">
   revert
   </a>
   </td><td>
   restore files to their checkout state
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/root">
   root
   </a>
   </td><td>
   print the root (top) of the current working directory
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/shellalias">
   shellalias
   </a>
   </td><td>
   (no help text available)
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/tag">
   tag
   </a>
   </td><td>
   add one or more tags for the current or given revision
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/tags">
   tags
   </a>
   </td><td>
   list repository tags
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/unbundle">
   unbundle
   </a>
   </td><td>
   apply one or more bundle files
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/verify">
   verify
   </a>
   </td><td>
   verify the integrity of the repository
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/version">
   version
   </a>
   </td><td>
   output version and copyright information
   </td></tr>
   
   
   </table>
   </div>
   </div>
   
   
   
   </body>
   </html>
   
 
   $ get-with-headers.py $LOCALIP:$HGPORT "help/add"
   200 Script output follows
   
   <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd">
   <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en-US">
   <head>
   <link rel="icon" href="/static/hgicon.png" type="image/png" />
   <meta name="robots" content="index, nofollow" />
   <link rel="stylesheet" href="/static/style-paper.css" type="text/css" />
   <script type="text/javascript" src="/static/mercurial.js"></script>
   
   <title>Help: add</title>
   </head>
   <body>
   
   <div class="container">
   <div class="menu">
   <div class="logo">
   <a href="https://mercurial-scm.org/">
   <img src="/static/hglogo.png" alt="mercurial" /></a>
   </div>
   <ul>
   <li><a href="/shortlog">log</a></li>
   <li><a href="/graph">graph</a></li>
   <li><a href="/tags">tags</a></li>
   <li><a href="/bookmarks">bookmarks</a></li>
   <li><a href="/branches">branches</a></li>
   </ul>
   <ul>
    <li class="active"><a href="/help">help</a></li>
   </ul>
   </div>
   
   <div class="main">
   <h2 class="breadcrumb"><a href="/">Mercurial</a> </h2>
   <h3>Help: add</h3>
   
   <form class="search" action="/log">
   
   <p><input name="rev" id="search1" type="text" size="30" value="" /></p>
   <div id="hint">Find changesets by keywords (author, files, the commit message), revision
   number or hash, or <a href="/help/revsets">revset expression</a>.</div>
   </form>
   <div id="doc">
   <p>
   hg add [OPTION]... [FILE]...
   </p>
   <p>
   add the specified files on the next commit
   </p>
   <p>
   Schedule files to be version controlled and added to the
   repository.
   </p>
   <p>
   The files will be added to the repository at the next commit. To
   undo an add before that, see 'hg forget'.
   </p>
   <p>
   If no names are given, add all files to the repository (except
   files matching &quot;.hgignore&quot;).
   </p>
   <p>
   Examples:
   </p>
   <ul>
    <li> New (unknown) files are added   automatically by 'hg add':
   <pre>
   \$ ls (re)
   foo.c
   \$ hg status (re)
   ? foo.c
   \$ hg add (re)
   adding foo.c
   \$ hg status (re)
   A foo.c
   </pre>
    <li> Specific files to be added can be specified:
   <pre>
   \$ ls (re)
   bar.c  foo.c
   \$ hg status (re)
   ? bar.c
   ? foo.c
   \$ hg add bar.c (re)
   \$ hg status (re)
   A bar.c
   ? foo.c
   </pre>
   </ul>
   <p>
   Returns 0 if all files are successfully added.
   </p>
   <p>
   options ([+] can be repeated):
   </p>
   <table>
   <tr><td>-I</td>
   <td>--include PATTERN [+]</td>
   <td>include names matching the given patterns</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-X</td>
   <td>--exclude PATTERN [+]</td>
   <td>exclude names matching the given patterns</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-S</td>
   <td>--subrepos</td>
   <td>recurse into subrepositories</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-n</td>
   <td>--dry-run</td>
   <td>do not perform actions, just print output</td></tr>
   </table>
   <p>
   global options ([+] can be repeated):
   </p>
   <table>
   <tr><td>-R</td>
   <td>--repository REPO</td>
   <td>repository root directory or name of overlay bundle file</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--cwd DIR</td>
   <td>change working directory</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-y</td>
   <td>--noninteractive</td>
   <td>do not prompt, automatically pick the first choice for all prompts</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-q</td>
   <td>--quiet</td>
   <td>suppress output</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-v</td>
   <td>--verbose</td>
   <td>enable additional output</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--color TYPE</td>
   <td>when to colorize (boolean, always, auto, never, or debug)</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--config CONFIG [+]</td>
   <td>set/override config option (use 'section.name=value')</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--debug</td>
   <td>enable debugging output</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--debugger</td>
   <td>start debugger</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--encoding ENCODE</td>
   <td>set the charset encoding (default: ascii)</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--encodingmode MODE</td>
   <td>set the charset encoding mode (default: strict)</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--traceback</td>
   <td>always print a traceback on exception</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--time</td>
   <td>time how long the command takes</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--profile</td>
   <td>print command execution profile</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--version</td>
   <td>output version information and exit</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-h</td>
   <td>--help</td>
   <td>display help and exit</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--hidden</td>
   <td>consider hidden changesets</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--pager TYPE</td>
   <td>when to paginate (boolean, always, auto, or never) (default: auto)</td></tr>
   </table>
   
   </div>
   </div>
   </div>
   
   
   
   </body>
   </html>
   
 
   $ get-with-headers.py $LOCALIP:$HGPORT "help/remove"
   200 Script output follows
   
   <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd">
   <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en-US">
   <head>
   <link rel="icon" href="/static/hgicon.png" type="image/png" />
   <meta name="robots" content="index, nofollow" />
   <link rel="stylesheet" href="/static/style-paper.css" type="text/css" />
   <script type="text/javascript" src="/static/mercurial.js"></script>
   
   <title>Help: remove</title>
   </head>
   <body>
   
   <div class="container">
   <div class="menu">
   <div class="logo">
   <a href="https://mercurial-scm.org/">
   <img src="/static/hglogo.png" alt="mercurial" /></a>
   </div>
   <ul>
   <li><a href="/shortlog">log</a></li>
   <li><a href="/graph">graph</a></li>
   <li><a href="/tags">tags</a></li>
   <li><a href="/bookmarks">bookmarks</a></li>
   <li><a href="/branches">branches</a></li>
   </ul>
   <ul>
    <li class="active"><a href="/help">help</a></li>
   </ul>
   </div>
   
   <div class="main">
   <h2 class="breadcrumb"><a href="/">Mercurial</a> </h2>
   <h3>Help: remove</h3>
   
   <form class="search" action="/log">
   
   <p><input name="rev" id="search1" type="text" size="30" value="" /></p>
   <div id="hint">Find changesets by keywords (author, files, the commit message), revision
   number or hash, or <a href="/help/revsets">revset expression</a>.</div>
   </form>
   <div id="doc">
   <p>
   hg remove [OPTION]... FILE...
   </p>
   <p>
   aliases: rm
   </p>
   <p>
   remove the specified files on the next commit
   </p>
   <p>
   Schedule the indicated files for removal from the current branch.
   </p>
   <p>
   This command schedules the files to be removed at the next commit.
   To undo a remove before that, see 'hg revert'. To undo added
   files, see 'hg forget'.
   </p>
   <p>
   -A/--after can be used to remove only files that have already
   been deleted, -f/--force can be used to force deletion, and -Af
   can be used to remove files from the next revision without
   deleting them from the working directory.
   </p>
   <p>
   The following table details the behavior of remove for different
   file states (columns) and option combinations (rows). The file
   states are Added [A], Clean [C], Modified [M] and Missing [!]
   (as reported by 'hg status'). The actions are Warn, Remove
   (from branch) and Delete (from disk):
   </p>
   <table>
   <tr><td>opt/state</td>
   <td>A</td>
   <td>C</td>
   <td>M</td>
   <td>!</td></tr>
   <tr><td>none</td>
   <td>W</td>
   <td>RD</td>
   <td>W</td>
   <td>R</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-f</td>
   <td>R</td>
   <td>RD</td>
   <td>RD</td>
   <td>R</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-A</td>
   <td>W</td>
   <td>W</td>
   <td>W</td>
   <td>R</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-Af</td>
   <td>R</td>
   <td>R</td>
   <td>R</td>
   <td>R</td></tr>
   </table>
   <p>
   <b>Note:</b> 
   </p>
   <p>
   'hg remove' never deletes files in Added [A] state from the
   working directory, not even if &quot;--force&quot; is specified.
   </p>
   <p>
   Returns 0 on success, 1 if any warnings encountered.
   </p>
   <p>
   options ([+] can be repeated):
   </p>
   <table>
   <tr><td>-A</td>
   <td>--after</td>
   <td>record delete for missing files</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-f</td>
   <td>--force</td>
   <td>forget added files, delete modified files</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-S</td>
   <td>--subrepos</td>
   <td>recurse into subrepositories</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-I</td>
   <td>--include PATTERN [+]</td>
   <td>include names matching the given patterns</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-X</td>
   <td>--exclude PATTERN [+]</td>
   <td>exclude names matching the given patterns</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-n</td>
   <td>--dry-run</td>
   <td>do not perform actions, just print output</td></tr>
   </table>
   <p>
   global options ([+] can be repeated):
   </p>
   <table>
   <tr><td>-R</td>
   <td>--repository REPO</td>
   <td>repository root directory or name of overlay bundle file</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--cwd DIR</td>
   <td>change working directory</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-y</td>
   <td>--noninteractive</td>
   <td>do not prompt, automatically pick the first choice for all prompts</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-q</td>
   <td>--quiet</td>
   <td>suppress output</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-v</td>
   <td>--verbose</td>
   <td>enable additional output</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--color TYPE</td>
   <td>when to colorize (boolean, always, auto, never, or debug)</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--config CONFIG [+]</td>
   <td>set/override config option (use 'section.name=value')</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--debug</td>
   <td>enable debugging output</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--debugger</td>
   <td>start debugger</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--encoding ENCODE</td>
   <td>set the charset encoding (default: ascii)</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--encodingmode MODE</td>
   <td>set the charset encoding mode (default: strict)</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--traceback</td>
   <td>always print a traceback on exception</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--time</td>
   <td>time how long the command takes</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--profile</td>
   <td>print command execution profile</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--version</td>
   <td>output version information and exit</td></tr>
   <tr><td>-h</td>
   <td>--help</td>
   <td>display help and exit</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--hidden</td>
   <td>consider hidden changesets</td></tr>
   <tr><td></td>
   <td>--pager TYPE</td>
   <td>when to paginate (boolean, always, auto, or never) (default: auto)</td></tr>
   </table>
   
   </div>
   </div>
   </div>
   
   
   
   </body>
   </html>
   
 
   $ get-with-headers.py $LOCALIP:$HGPORT "help/dates"
   200 Script output follows
   
   <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd">
   <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en-US">
   <head>
   <link rel="icon" href="/static/hgicon.png" type="image/png" />
   <meta name="robots" content="index, nofollow" />
   <link rel="stylesheet" href="/static/style-paper.css" type="text/css" />
   <script type="text/javascript" src="/static/mercurial.js"></script>
   
   <title>Help: dates</title>
   </head>
   <body>
   
   <div class="container">
   <div class="menu">
   <div class="logo">
   <a href="https://mercurial-scm.org/">
   <img src="/static/hglogo.png" alt="mercurial" /></a>
   </div>
   <ul>
   <li><a href="/shortlog">log</a></li>
   <li><a href="/graph">graph</a></li>
   <li><a href="/tags">tags</a></li>
   <li><a href="/bookmarks">bookmarks</a></li>
   <li><a href="/branches">branches</a></li>
   </ul>
   <ul>
    <li class="active"><a href="/help">help</a></li>
   </ul>
   </div>
   
   <div class="main">
   <h2 class="breadcrumb"><a href="/">Mercurial</a> </h2>
   <h3>Help: dates</h3>
   
   <form class="search" action="/log">
   
   <p><input name="rev" id="search1" type="text" size="30" value="" /></p>
   <div id="hint">Find changesets by keywords (author, files, the commit message), revision
   number or hash, or <a href="/help/revsets">revset expression</a>.</div>
   </form>
   <div id="doc">
   <h1>Date Formats</h1>
   <p>
   Some commands allow the user to specify a date, e.g.:
   </p>
   <ul>
    <li> backout, commit, import, tag: Specify the commit date.
    <li> log, revert, update: Select revision(s) by date.
   </ul>
   <p>
   Many date formats are valid. Here are some examples:
   </p>
   <ul>
    <li> &quot;Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006&quot; (local timezone assumed)
    <li> &quot;Dec 6 13:18 -0600&quot; (year assumed, time offset provided)
    <li> &quot;Dec 6 13:18 UTC&quot; (UTC and GMT are aliases for +0000)
    <li> &quot;Dec 6&quot; (midnight)
    <li> &quot;13:18&quot; (today assumed)
    <li> &quot;3:39&quot; (3:39AM assumed)
    <li> &quot;3:39pm&quot; (15:39)
    <li> &quot;2006-12-06 13:18:29&quot; (ISO 8601 format)
    <li> &quot;2006-12-6 13:18&quot;
    <li> &quot;2006-12-6&quot;
    <li> &quot;12-6&quot;
    <li> &quot;12/6&quot;
    <li> &quot;12/6/6&quot; (Dec 6 2006)
    <li> &quot;today&quot; (midnight)
    <li> &quot;yesterday&quot; (midnight)
    <li> &quot;now&quot; - right now
   </ul>
   <p>
   Lastly, there is Mercurial's internal format:
   </p>
   <ul>
    <li> &quot;1165411109 0&quot; (Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006 UTC)
   </ul>
   <p>
   This is the internal representation format for dates. The first number
   is the number of seconds since the epoch (1970-01-01 00:00 UTC). The
   second is the offset of the local timezone, in seconds west of UTC
   (negative if the timezone is east of UTC).
   </p>
   <p>
   The log command also accepts date ranges:
   </p>
   <ul>
    <li> &quot;&lt;DATE&quot; - at or before a given date/time
    <li> &quot;&gt;DATE&quot; - on or after a given date/time
    <li> &quot;DATE to DATE&quot; - a date range, inclusive
    <li> &quot;-DAYS&quot; - within a given number of days of today
   </ul>
   
   </div>
   </div>
   </div>
   
   
   
   </body>
   </html>
   
 
   $ get-with-headers.py $LOCALIP:$HGPORT "help/pager"
   200 Script output follows
   
   <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd">
   <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en-US">
   <head>
   <link rel="icon" href="/static/hgicon.png" type="image/png" />
   <meta name="robots" content="index, nofollow" />
   <link rel="stylesheet" href="/static/style-paper.css" type="text/css" />
   <script type="text/javascript" src="/static/mercurial.js"></script>
   
   <title>Help: pager</title>
   </head>
   <body>
   
   <div class="container">
   <div class="menu">
   <div class="logo">
   <a href="https://mercurial-scm.org/">
   <img src="/static/hglogo.png" alt="mercurial" /></a>
   </div>
   <ul>
   <li><a href="/shortlog">log</a></li>
   <li><a href="/graph">graph</a></li>
   <li><a href="/tags">tags</a></li>
   <li><a href="/bookmarks">bookmarks</a></li>
   <li><a href="/branches">branches</a></li>
   </ul>
   <ul>
    <li class="active"><a href="/help">help</a></li>
   </ul>
   </div>
   
   <div class="main">
   <h2 class="breadcrumb"><a href="/">Mercurial</a> </h2>
   <h3>Help: pager</h3>
   
   <form class="search" action="/log">
   
   <p><input name="rev" id="search1" type="text" size="30" value="" /></p>
   <div id="hint">Find changesets by keywords (author, files, the commit message), revision
   number or hash, or <a href="/help/revsets">revset expression</a>.</div>
   </form>
   <div id="doc">
   <h1>Pager Support</h1>
   <p>
   Some Mercurial commands can produce a lot of output, and Mercurial will
   attempt to use a pager to make those commands more pleasant.
   </p>
   <p>
   To set the pager that should be used, set the application variable:
   </p>
   <pre>
   [pager]
   pager = less -FRX
   </pre>
   <p>
   If no pager is set in the user or repository configuration, Mercurial uses the
   environment variable $PAGER. If $PAGER is not set, pager.pager from the default
   or system configuration is used. If none of these are set, a default pager will
   be used, typically 'less' on Unix and 'more' on Windows.
   </p>
   <p>
   You can disable the pager for certain commands by adding them to the
   pager.ignore list:
   </p>
   <pre>
   [pager]
   ignore = version, help, update
   </pre>
   <p>
   To ignore global commands like 'hg version' or 'hg help', you have
   to specify them in your user configuration file.
   </p>
   <p>
   To control whether the pager is used at all for an individual command,
   you can use --pager=&lt;value&gt;:
   </p>
   <ul>
    <li> use as needed: 'auto'.
    <li> require the pager: 'yes' or 'on'.
    <li> suppress the pager: 'no' or 'off' (any unrecognized value   will also work).
   </ul>
   <p>
   To globally turn off all attempts to use a pager, set:
   </p>
   <pre>
   [ui]
   paginate = never
   </pre>
   <p>
   which will prevent the pager from running.
   </p>
   
   </div>
   </div>
   </div>
   
   
   
   </body>
   </html>
   
 
 Sub-topic indexes rendered properly
 
   $ get-with-headers.py $LOCALIP:$HGPORT "help/internals"
   200 Script output follows
   
   <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd">
   <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en-US">
   <head>
   <link rel="icon" href="/static/hgicon.png" type="image/png" />
   <meta name="robots" content="index, nofollow" />
   <link rel="stylesheet" href="/static/style-paper.css" type="text/css" />
   <script type="text/javascript" src="/static/mercurial.js"></script>
   
   <title>Help: internals</title>
   </head>
   <body>
   
   <div class="container">
   <div class="menu">
   <div class="logo">
   <a href="https://mercurial-scm.org/">
   <img src="/static/hglogo.png" alt="mercurial" /></a>
   </div>
   <ul>
   <li><a href="/shortlog">log</a></li>
   <li><a href="/graph">graph</a></li>
   <li><a href="/tags">tags</a></li>
   <li><a href="/bookmarks">bookmarks</a></li>
   <li><a href="/branches">branches</a></li>
   </ul>
   <ul>
   <li><a href="/help">help</a></li>
   </ul>
   </div>
   
   <div class="main">
   <h2 class="breadcrumb"><a href="/">Mercurial</a> </h2>
   
   <form class="search" action="/log">
   
   <p><input name="rev" id="search1" type="text" size="30" value="" /></p>
   <div id="hint">Find changesets by keywords (author, files, the commit message), revision
   number or hash, or <a href="/help/revsets">revset expression</a>.</div>
   </form>
   <table class="bigtable">
   <tr><td colspan="2"><h2><a name="topics" href="#topics">Topics</a></h2></td></tr>
   
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/internals.bundle2">
   bundle2
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Bundle2
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/internals.bundles">
   bundles
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Bundles
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/internals.cbor">
   cbor
   </a>
   </td><td>
   CBOR
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/internals.censor">
   censor
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Censor
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/internals.changegroups">
   changegroups
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Changegroups
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/internals.config">
   config
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Config Registrar
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/internals.extensions">
   extensions
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Extension API
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/internals.requirements">
   requirements
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Repository Requirements
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/internals.revlogs">
   revlogs
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Revision Logs
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/internals.wireprotocol">
   wireprotocol
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Wire Protocol
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/internals.wireprotocolrpc">
   wireprotocolrpc
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Wire Protocol RPC
   </td></tr>
   <tr><td>
   <a href="/help/internals.wireprotocolv2">
   wireprotocolv2
   </a>
   </td><td>
   Wire Protocol Version 2
   </td></tr>
   
   
   
   
   
   </table>
   </div>
   </div>
   
   
   
   </body>
   </html>
   
 
 Sub-topic topics rendered properly
 
   $ get-with-headers.py $LOCALIP:$HGPORT "help/internals.changegroups"
   200 Script output follows
   
   <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd">
   <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en-US">
   <head>
   <link rel="icon" href="/static/hgicon.png" type="image/png" />
   <meta name="robots" content="index, nofollow" />
   <link rel="stylesheet" href="/static/style-paper.css" type="text/css" />
   <script type="text/javascript" src="/static/mercurial.js"></script>
   
   <title>Help: internals.changegroups</title>
   </head>
   <body>
   
   <div class="container">
   <div class="menu">
   <div class="logo">
   <a href="https://mercurial-scm.org/">
   <img src="/static/hglogo.png" alt="mercurial" /></a>
   </div>
   <ul>
   <li><a href="/shortlog">log</a></li>
   <li><a href="/graph">graph</a></li>
   <li><a href="/tags">tags</a></li>
   <li><a href="/bookmarks">bookmarks</a></li>
   <li><a href="/branches">branches</a></li>
   </ul>
   <ul>
    <li class="active"><a href="/help">help</a></li>
   </ul>
   </div>
   
   <div class="main">
   <h2 class="breadcrumb"><a href="/">Mercurial</a> </h2>
   <h3>Help: internals.changegroups</h3>
   
   <form class="search" action="/log">
   
   <p><input name="rev" id="search1" type="text" size="30" value="" /></p>
   <div id="hint">Find changesets by keywords (author, files, the commit message), revision
   number or hash, or <a href="/help/revsets">revset expression</a>.</div>
   </form>
   <div id="doc">
   <h1>Changegroups</h1>
   <p>
   Changegroups are representations of repository revlog data, specifically
   the changelog data, root/flat manifest data, treemanifest data, and
   filelogs.
   </p>
   <p>
   There are 3 versions of changegroups: &quot;1&quot;, &quot;2&quot;, and &quot;3&quot;. From a
   high-level, versions &quot;1&quot; and &quot;2&quot; are almost exactly the same, with the
   only difference being an additional item in the *delta header*. Version
   &quot;3&quot; adds support for storage flags in the *delta header* and optionally
   exchanging treemanifests (enabled by setting an option on the
   &quot;changegroup&quot; part in the bundle2).
   </p>
   <p>
   Changegroups when not exchanging treemanifests consist of 3 logical
   segments:
   </p>
   <pre>
   +---------------------------------+
   |           |          |          |
   | changeset | manifest | filelogs |
   |           |          |          |
   |           |          |          |
   +---------------------------------+
   </pre>
   <p>
   When exchanging treemanifests, there are 4 logical segments:
   </p>
   <pre>
   +-------------------------------------------------+
   |           |          |               |          |
   | changeset |   root   | treemanifests | filelogs |
   |           | manifest |               |          |
   |           |          |               |          |
   +-------------------------------------------------+
   </pre>
   <p>
   The principle building block of each segment is a *chunk*. A *chunk*
   is a framed piece of data:
   </p>
   <pre>
   +---------------------------------------+
   |           |                           |
   |  length   |           data            |
   | (4 bytes) |   (&lt;length - 4&gt; bytes)    |
   |           |                           |
   +---------------------------------------+
   </pre>
   <p>
   All integers are big-endian signed integers. Each chunk starts with a 32-bit
   integer indicating the length of the entire chunk (including the length field
   itself).
   </p>
   <p>
   There is a special case chunk that has a value of 0 for the length
   (&quot;0x00000000&quot;). We call this an *empty chunk*.
   </p>
   <h2>Delta Groups</h2>
   <p>
   A *delta group* expresses the content of a revlog as a series of deltas,
   or patches against previous revisions.
   </p>
   <p>
   Delta groups consist of 0 or more *chunks* followed by the *empty chunk*
   to signal the end of the delta group:
   </p>
   <pre>
   +------------------------------------------------------------------------+
   |                |             |               |             |           |
   | chunk0 length  | chunk0 data | chunk1 length | chunk1 data |    0x0    |
   |   (4 bytes)    |  (various)  |   (4 bytes)   |  (various)  | (4 bytes) |
   |                |             |               |             |           |
   +------------------------------------------------------------------------+
   </pre>
   <p>
   Each *chunk*'s data consists of the following:
   </p>
   <pre>
   +---------------------------------------+
   |                        |              |
   |     delta header       |  delta data  |
   |  (various by version)  |  (various)   |
   |                        |              |
   +---------------------------------------+
   </pre>
   <p>
   The *delta data* is a series of *delta*s that describe a diff from an existing
   entry (either that the recipient already has, or previously specified in the
   bundle/changegroup).
   </p>
   <p>
   The *delta header* is different between versions &quot;1&quot;, &quot;2&quot;, and
   &quot;3&quot; of the changegroup format.
   </p>
   <p>
   Version 1 (headerlen=80):
   </p>
   <pre>
   +------------------------------------------------------+
   |            |             |             |             |
   |    node    |   p1 node   |   p2 node   |  link node  |
   | (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) |
   |            |             |             |             |
   +------------------------------------------------------+
   </pre>
   <p>
   Version 2 (headerlen=100):
   </p>
   <pre>
   +------------------------------------------------------------------+
   |            |             |             |            |            |
   |    node    |   p1 node   |   p2 node   | base node  | link node  |
   | (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) | (20 bytes) | (20 bytes) |
   |            |             |             |            |            |
   +------------------------------------------------------------------+
   </pre>
   <p>
   Version 3 (headerlen=102):
   </p>
   <pre>
   +------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
   |            |             |             |            |            |           |
   |    node    |   p1 node   |   p2 node   | base node  | link node  |   flags   |
   | (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) |  (20 bytes) | (20 bytes) | (20 bytes) | (2 bytes) |
   |            |             |             |            |            |           |
   +------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
   </pre>
   <p>
   The *delta data* consists of &quot;chunklen - 4 - headerlen&quot; bytes, which contain a
   series of *delta*s, densely packed (no separators). These deltas describe a diff
   from an existing entry (either that the recipient already has, or previously
   specified in the bundle/changegroup). The format is described more fully in
   &quot;hg help internals.bdiff&quot;, but briefly:
   </p>
   <pre>
   +---------------------------------------------------------------+
   |              |            |            |                      |
   | start offset | end offset | new length |        content       |
   |  (4 bytes)   |  (4 bytes) |  (4 bytes) | (&lt;new length&gt; bytes) |
   |              |            |            |                      |
   +---------------------------------------------------------------+
   </pre>
   <p>
   Please note that the length field in the delta data does *not* include itself.
   </p>
   <p>
   In version 1, the delta is always applied against the previous node from
   the changegroup or the first parent if this is the first entry in the
   changegroup.
   </p>
   <p>
   In version 2 and up, the delta base node is encoded in the entry in the
   changegroup. This allows the delta to be expressed against any parent,
   which can result in smaller deltas and more efficient encoding of data.
   </p>
   <p>
   The *flags* field holds bitwise flags affecting the processing of revision
   data. The following flags are defined:
   </p>
   <dl>
    <dt>32768
    <dd>Censored revision. The revision's fulltext has been replaced by censor metadata. May only occur on file revisions.
    <dt>16384
    <dd>Ellipsis revision. Revision hash does not match data (likely due to rewritten parents).
    <dt>8192
    <dd>Externally stored. The revision fulltext contains &quot;key:value&quot; &quot;\n&quot; delimited metadata defining an object stored elsewhere. Used by the LFS extension.
   </dl>
   <p>
   For historical reasons, the integer values are identical to revlog version 1
   per-revision storage flags and correspond to bits being set in this 2-byte
   field. Bits were allocated starting from the most-significant bit, hence the
   reverse ordering and allocation of these flags.
   </p>
   <h2>Changeset Segment</h2>
   <p>
   The *changeset segment* consists of a single *delta group* holding
   changelog data. The *empty chunk* at the end of the *delta group* denotes
   the boundary to the *manifest segment*.
   </p>
   <h2>Manifest Segment</h2>
   <p>
   The *manifest segment* consists of a single *delta group* holding manifest
   data. If treemanifests are in use, it contains only the manifest for the
   root directory of the repository. Otherwise, it contains the entire
   manifest data. The *empty chunk* at the end of the *delta group* denotes
   the boundary to the next segment (either the *treemanifests segment* or the
   *filelogs segment*, depending on version and the request options).
   </p>
   <h3>Treemanifests Segment</h3>
   <p>
   The *treemanifests segment* only exists in changegroup version &quot;3&quot;, and
   only if the 'treemanifest' param is part of the bundle2 changegroup part
   (it is not possible to use changegroup version 3 outside of bundle2).
   Aside from the filenames in the *treemanifests segment* containing a
   trailing &quot;/&quot; character, it behaves identically to the *filelogs segment*
   (see below). The final sub-segment is followed by an *empty chunk* (logically,
   a sub-segment with filename size 0). This denotes the boundary to the
   *filelogs segment*.
   </p>
   <h2>Filelogs Segment</h2>
   <p>
   The *filelogs segment* consists of multiple sub-segments, each
   corresponding to an individual file whose data is being described:
   </p>
   <pre>
   +--------------------------------------------------+
   |          |          |          |     |           |
   | filelog0 | filelog1 | filelog2 | ... |    0x0    |
   |          |          |          |     | (4 bytes) |
   |          |          |          |     |           |
   +--------------------------------------------------+
   </pre>
   <p>
   The final filelog sub-segment is followed by an *empty chunk* (logically,
   a sub-segment with filename size 0). This denotes the end of the segment
   and of the overall changegroup.
   </p>
   <p>
   Each filelog sub-segment consists of the following:
   </p>
   <pre>
   +------------------------------------------------------+
   |                 |                      |             |
   | filename length |       filename       | delta group |
   |    (4 bytes)    | (&lt;length - 4&gt; bytes) |  (various)  |
   |                 |                      |             |
   +------------------------------------------------------+
   </pre>
   <p>
   That is, a *chunk* consisting of the filename (not terminated or padded)
   followed by N chunks constituting the *delta group* for this file. The
   *empty chunk* at the end of each *delta group* denotes the boundary to the
   next filelog sub-segment.
   </p>
   
   </div>
   </div>
   </div>
   
   
   
   </body>
   </html>
   
 
   $ get-with-headers.py 127.0.0.1:$HGPORT "help/unknowntopic"
   404 Not Found
   
   <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.1//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml11/DTD/xhtml11.dtd">
   <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en-US">
   <head>
   <link rel="icon" href="/static/hgicon.png" type="image/png" />
   <meta name="robots" content="index, nofollow" />
   <link rel="stylesheet" href="/static/style-paper.css" type="text/css" />
   <script type="text/javascript" src="/static/mercurial.js"></script>
   
   <title>test: error</title>
   </head>
   <body>
   
   <div class="container">
   <div class="menu">
   <div class="logo">
   <a href="https://mercurial-scm.org/">
   <img src="/static/hglogo.png" width=75 height=90 border=0 alt="mercurial" /></a>
   </div>
   <ul>
   <li><a href="/shortlog">log</a></li>
   <li><a href="/graph">graph</a></li>
   <li><a href="/tags">tags</a></li>
   <li><a href="/bookmarks">bookmarks</a></li>
   <li><a href="/branches">branches</a></li>
   </ul>
   <ul>
   <li><a href="/help">help</a></li>
   </ul>
   </div>
   
   <div class="main">
   
   <h2 class="breadcrumb"><a href="/">Mercurial</a> </h2>
   <h3>error</h3>
   
   
   <form class="search" action="/log">
   
   <p><input name="rev" id="search1" type="text" size="30" value="" /></p>
   <div id="hint">Find changesets by keywords (author, files, the commit message), revision
   number or hash, or <a href="/help/revsets">revset expression</a>.</div>
   </form>
   
   <div class="description">
   <p>
   An error occurred while processing your request:
   </p>
   <p>
   Not Found
   </p>
   </div>
   </div>
   </div>
   
   
   
   </body>
   </html>
   
   [1]
 
   $ killdaemons.py
 
 #endif